Application Guide

iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

drives.danfoss.com |
 Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Contents
1 Introduction and Safety
Contents
1.1 Purpose of this Application Guide 11

1.2 Additional Resources 11

1.3 Version History 11

1.4 Safety Symbols 11

1.5 General Safety Considerations 12

1.6 Qualified Personnel 13

2 Application Software Overview

2.1 iC2-Micro Application Software Overview 14

2.2 Basic Functions 14

2.2.1 Basic Functions Overview 14

2.2.2 Reference Handling 14

2.2.3 Two Setups 14

2.2.4 Ramps 14

2.2.5 Quick Stop 14

2.2.6 Limit Rotation Direction 14

2.2.7 Motor Phase Switch 15

2.2.8 Inching with Jogging Modes 15

2.2.9 Frequency Bypass 15

2.2.10 Automatic Restart 15

2.2.11 Flying Start 15

2.2.12 Mains Dropout 15

2.2.13 Kinetic Backup 15

2.2.14 Resonance Damping 15

2.2.15 Mechanical Brake Control 15

2.2.16 Controllers 15

2.3 IO Control and Readouts 16

2.4 Motor Control Features 16

2.4.1 Motor Control Features Overview 16

2.4.2 Motor Types 16

2.4.3 Load Characterstics 16

2.4.4 Motor Control Principle 16

2.4.5 Motor Nameplate and Catalog 16

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 3

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2.4.6 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 17

2.4.7 Automation Energy Optimization (AEO) 17

2.5 Braking of Load 17

2.5.1 Braking of Load Overview 17

2.5.2 Resistor Braking 17

2.5.3 Overvoltage Control (OVC) 17

2.5.4 DC Brake 17

2.5.5 AC Brake 17

2.5.6 DC Hold 17

2.5.7 Load Sharing 17

2.6 Protection Features 17

2.6.1 Grid Protections 17

2.6.2 Drive Protection Features 18

2.6.3 Motor Protection Features 18

2.6.4 Protection of Externally Connected Components 18

2.6.5 Automatic Derating 18

2.7 Monitoring Features 18

2.7.1 Monitoring Features Overview 18

2.7.2 Speed Monitoring 18

2.7.3 Event Log and Operational Counters 19

2.8 Software Tools 19

2.8.1 Software Tools Overview 19

2.8.2 MyDrive® Select 19

2.8.3 MyDrive® Harmonics 19

2.8.4 MyDrive® ecoSmart™ 19

2.8.5 MyDrive® Insight 19

3 User Interfaces and How to Configure

3.1 Overview of User Interfaces 20

3.2 Control Panel 20

3.2.1 Overview of Control Panel 20

3.2.2 Control Panel and Control Panel 2.0 OP2 20

3.2.3 Control Panel Buttons and Indicators 21

3.2.4 Control Panel Basic Configuration 23

3.2.4.1 Overview of Control Panel Basic Configuration 23

3.2.4.2 Understanding Readout Screens 23

4 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.4.3 Menu Group Screen and Navigation 24

3.2.4.4 Restoring Default Settings 28

3.2.5 Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Buttons and Indicators 29

3.2.6 Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Basic Configurations 30

3.2.6.1 Overview 30

3.2.6.2 Understanding Readout Screens 30

3.2.6.3 Menu Screen and Navigation 31

3.2.6.4 Parameter Group Screens and Overall Navigation 32

3.2.6.5 Changing Selections in a Parameter 32

3.2.6.6 Changing Parameter Value 33

3.3 MyDrive® Insight 34

3.3.1 Overview of MyDrive® Insight 34

3.3.2 Getting Started with MyDrive® Insight 35

3.3.3 Accessing Parameters and Understanding Parameter Screens in MyDrive® Insight 36

3.3.4 Viewing and Changing Parameter Settings 39

3.3.5 PC Control to Operate the Drive using MyDrive® Insight 40

3.3.6 Backing Up the Drive 41

3.3.7 Restoring the Data to the Drive 43

4 Application Software Structure and Overview

4.1 Understanding Application Software Structure 45

4.2 Parameter Groups, Related Content, and Settings 45

5 Configuration Setup Examples

5.1 Introduction & Prerequisite 48

5.2 Basic Setup of a Drive 49

5.3 Setting up the Drive using Quick Access via Control Panel 50

5.4 Motor Configuration 50

5.4.1 Motor Configuration Overview 50

5.4.2 Asynchronous Motor Setup 50

5.4.3 PM Motor Setup in VVC+ 51

5.4.4 Speed Control Configuration with I/O Using Default 53

5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 54

5.5 Application Selection 54

5.5.1 Application Selection Overview 54

5.5.2 Configuring Speed Control Mode 55

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 5

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

5.5.3 Configuring Process Control Mode 57

5.5.4 Configuring Multi-Speed Control Mode 59

5.5.5 Configuring Wire Control Mode 61

5.5.6 Configuring Torque Control Mode 64

5.6 Reference Handling 66

5.6.1 Local/Remote Reference 66

5.6.2 Reference Limits 68

5.6.3 Scaling of Preset References and Bus References 69

5.6.4 Scaling of Analog and Pulse References and Feedback 69

5.6.5 Dead Band Around Zero 70

6 RS485 Configurations

6.1 RS485 Installation and Set up 73

6.1.1 Introduction 73

6.1.2 Connecting the Drive to the RS485 Network 74

6.1.3 Hardware Setup 74

6.1.4 Parameter Settings for RS485 Communication 74

6.1.5 EMC Precautions 75

6.1.6 FC Protocol 76

6.1.6.1 FC Protocol Overview 76

6.1.6.2 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure 77

6.1.6.3 Examples 82

6.1.7 Modbus RTU 83

6.1.7.1 Modbus RTU Introduction 83

6.1.7.2 Drive with Modbus RTU 84

6.1.7.3 Network Configuration 85

6.1.7.4 Modbus RTU Message Framing Structure 85

6.1.7.5 How to Access Parameters 89

6.1.7.6 Examples 90

6.1.8 Danfoss FC Control Profile 96

6.1.8.1 Control Word According to FC Profile 96

6.1.8.2 Explanation of Control Word Bit 97

6.1.8.3 Status Word According to FC Profile (STW) 99

6.1.8.4 Explanation of Status Word Bit 100

6.1.8.5 Bus Speed Reference Value 102

6.2 How to Control the Drive 103

6.2.1 Introduction 103

6 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.2.2 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU 103

6.2.3 Modbus Exception Codes 103

7 Parameter Descriptions

7.1 Reading the Parameter Table 105

7.1.1 Understanding Parameter Types 105

7.1.2 Understanding Data Types 105

7.1.3 Understanding Access Types 106

7.2 Grid (Menu Index 1) 106

7.2.1 Grid Settings (Menu Index 1.2) 106

7.2.2 Grid Protection (Menu Index 1.3) 107

7.3 Power Conversion & DC-link (Menu Index 2) 108

7.3.1 Status (Menu Index 2.1) 108

7.3.2 Protection (Menu Index 2.3) 109

7.3.3 Modulation (Menu Index 2.4) 115

7.3.4 DC-Link Control (Menu Index 2.5) 117

7.3.5 Output Current Limit (Menu Index 2.7) 118

7.4 Filters & Brake Chopper (Menu Index 3) 119

7.4.1 Status (Menu Index 3.1) 119

7.4.2 Brake Chopper (Menu Index 3.2) 119

7.4.3 Brake Resistor (Menu Index 3.3) 120

7.5 Motor (Menu Index 4) 121

7.5.1 Status (Menu Index 4.1) 121

7.5.2 Motor Data (Menu Index 4.2) 123

7.5.2.1 General Settings (Menu Index 4.2.1) 123

7.5.2.2 Nameplate Data (Menu Index 4.2.2) 125

7.5.2.3 Async. Induction Motor (Menu Index 4.2.3) 126

7.5.2.4 Permanent Magnet Motor (Menu Index 4.2.4) 127

7.5.3 Motor Control (Menu Index 4.4) 129

7.5.3.1 General Settings (Menu Index 4.4.1) 129

7.5.3.2 AC-Brake (Menu Index 4.4.2) 130

7.5.3.3 U/f Curve (Menu Index 4.4.3) 131

7.5.3.4 Dependent Setting (Menu Index 4.4.4) 132

7.5.3.5 Dead Time Compensation (Menu Index 4.4.4.5) 135

7.5.4 Protection (Menu Index 4.6) 136

7.6 Application (Menu Index 5) 142

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 7

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.6.1 Status (Menu Index 5.1) 142

7.6.2 Protection (Menu Index 5.2) 145

7.6.3 Operation Mode (Menu Index 5.4) 148

7.6.4 Control (Menu Index 5.5) 149

7.6.4.1 General Settings (Menu Index 5.5.1) 149

7.6.4.2 Digital/Bus (Menu Index 5.5.2) 152

7.6.4.3 Reference (Menu Index 5.5.3) 156

7.6.4.4 Ramp (Menu Index 5.5.4) 162

7.6.5 Start Settings (Menu Index 5.6) 164

7.6.6 Stop Settings (Menu Index 5.7) 169

7.6.7 Speed Control (Menu Index 5.8) 172

7.6.8 Inching (Menu Index 5.9) 174

7.6.9 Torque Control (Menu Index 5.10) 174

7.6.10 Mechanical Brake Control (Menu Index 5.11) 176

7.6.11 Process Control (Menu Index 5.12) 177

7.6.11.1 Status (Menu Index 5.12.1) 177

7.6.11.2 Feedback (Menu Index 5.12.4) 178

7.6.11.3 PID Controller (Menu Index 5.12.5) 180

7.6.11.4 Feed Forward (Menu Index 5.12.6) 182

7.6.11.5 Sleep Mode (Menu Index 5.12.7) 182

7.6.12 Fieldbus Process Data (Menu Index 5.27) 185

7.7 Maintenance and Service (Menu Index 6) 188

7.7.1 Status (Menu Index 6.1) 188

7.7.2 Software Information (Menu Index 6.2) 191

7.7.3 Cooling Fan (Menu Index 6.5) 191

7.7.4 Parameter Handling (Menu Index 6.6) 192

7.7.5 Drive Identification (Menu Index 6.7) 196

7.8 Customization (Menu Index 8) 198

7.8.1 Custom Readout (Menu Index 8.1) 198

7.8.2 Smart Logic Controller (Menu Index 8.4) 200

7.8.2.1 Overview of Smart Logic Controller 200

7.8.2.2 Status (Menu Index 8.4.1) 200

7.8.2.3 SLC Settings (Menu Index 8.4.2) 201

7.8.2.4 Comparators (Menu Index 8.4.3) 205

7.8.2.5 Timers (Menu Index 8.4.4) 207

7.8.2.6 Logic Rules (Menu Index 8.4.5) 207

7.8.2.7 States (Menu Index 8.4.6) 214

8 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.9 I/O (Menu Index 9) 217

7.9.1 I/O (Menu Index 9.3) 217

7.9.1.1 I/O Status (Menu Index 9.3) 217

7.9.2 Digital Inputs/Outputs (Menu Index 9.4) 219

7.9.2.1 Digital Input Setting (Menu Index 9.4.1) 219

7.9.2.2 T15 as Digital Output (Menu Index 9.4.2) 235

7.9.2.3 Relay (Menu Index 9.4.3) 239

7.9.2.4 T18 as Pulse Input (Menu Index 9.4.4) 244

7.9.2.5 T15 as Pulse Output (Menu Index 9.4.5) 246

7.9.2.6 Bus Control (Menu Index 9.4.6) 247

7.9.3 Analog Inputs/Outputs (Menu Index 9.5) 248

7.9.3.1 Output Terminal 31 (Menu Index 9.5.1) 248

7.9.3.2 Input Terminal 33 (Menu Index 9.5.2) 250

7.9.3.3 Input Terminal 34 (Menu Index 9.5.3) 253

7.9.3.4 Potentiometer Reference (Menu Index 9.5.4) 255

7.9.3.5 Live Zero (Menu Index 9.5.6) 256

7.10 Connectivity (Menu Index 10) 257

7.10.1 FC Port Settings (Menu Index 10.1) 257

7.10.2 FC Port Diagnostics (Menu Index 10.2) 259

8 Troubleshooting

8.1 Introduction 261

8.2 Faults 261

8.3 Warnings 261

8.4 Warning/Fault Messages 261

8.5 Warning and Fault Events 262

8.6 Fault Words, Warning Words, and Extended Status Words 264

8.7 List of Faults and Warnings 266

9 Appendix

9.1 Parameter Lists 275

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 9

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

10 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

1 Introduction and Safety

1.1 Purpose of this Application Guide
This application guide is intended for qualified personnel such as:

l Automation engineers
l Application and product specialists who have experience operating with parameters and basic knowledge of AC drives.

The application guide, which provides information on the parameters to configure and control the frequency converter, procedures
to operate the user interfaces of the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters, typical application examples with recommended settings, and
troubleshooting of alarms and warnings that might occur.

1.2 Additional Resources

Following are the additional resources available to further understand the features, safely install, and operate the iC2-Micro Frequency
Converters.

l The operating guide, which provides information about the installation, commissioning, and maintenance of iC2-Micro Frequency
Converters.
l The design guide, which provides technical information to understand the capabilities of the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters for
integration into motor control and monitoring systems.

1.3 Version History

This manual is regularly reviewed and updated. All suggestions for improvement are welcome.

The original language of this manual is in English.

Manual Version Remarks

AB413939445838en, version 03 Information in this version of the manual applies to software version 1.20.

1.4 Safety Symbols

The following symbols are used in Danfoss documentation.

DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related (for example, messages relating to property damage).

The guide also includes ISO warning symbols related to hot surfaces and burn hazard, high voltage and electrical shock, and referring to
the instructions.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 11

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

ISO warning symbol for hot surfaces and burn hazard

ISO warning symbol for high voltage and electrical shock

ISO action symbol for referring to the instructions

1.5 General Safety Considerations

When installing or operating the AC drive, pay attention to the safety information given in the instructions. For more information about
safety guidelines for installation and operation, refer to the drive's operating guide.

Safe operation guidelines

l The drive is not suitable as the only safety device in the system. Make sure that additional monitoring and protection devices on
drives, motors, and accessories are installed according to the regional safety guidelines and accident prevention regulations.
l Before activating any automatic fault reset functions or change limit values, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur after
restart. If the auto reset function is activated, the motor starts automatically after an automatic fault reset.
l Keep all doors and covers closed and terminal boxes screwed on during operation of the drive and when mains is connected.
l Drive components and accessories can still be live and connected to mains, even after the operation indicators are no longer
illuminated.

WARNING
LACK OF SAFETY AWARENESS
This guide provides important information on preventing injury and damage to the equipment or the system.
Ignoring this information can lead to death, serious injury, or severe damage to the equipment.
l Make sure to fully understand the dangers and safety measures present in the application.
l Before performing any electrical work on the drive, lock out and tag out all power sources to the drive.

WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
AC drives contain hazardous voltage when connected to the AC mains or connected on the DC terminals.
Failure to perform installation, start-up, and maintenance by qualified personnel can result in death or serious
injury.
l Only qualified personnel must perform installation, start-up, and maintenance.

WARNING
DISCHARGE TIME
The drive contains DC-link capacitors, which can remain charged even when the drive is not powered. High
voltage can be present even when the warning indicator lights are off.
l Stop the motor, disconnect AC mains, permanent magnet type motors, and remove DC-link supplies,
including battery backups, UPS, and DC-link connections to other drives.
l Wait for the capacitors to discharge fully and measure it before performing any service or repair work.
l The minimum waiting time is specified in the table Discharge time.

12 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 1: Discharge Time

Enclosure size Minimum waiting time (minutes)

MA01c–MA02c and MA01a–MA03a 4

MA04a–MA05a 15

CAUTION
INTERNAL FAILURE HAZARD
An internal failure in the drive can result in serious injury when the drive is not properly closed.
l Ensure that all safety covers are in place and securely fastened before applying power.

CAUTION
HOT SURFACES
The drive contains metal components that are still hot even after the drive has been powered off. Failure to
observe the high-temperature symbol (yellow triangle) on the drive can result in serious burns.
l Be aware that internal components, such as busbars, may be extremely hot even after the drive has been
powered off.
l Do not touch exterior areas that are marked by the high-temperature symbol (yellow triangle). These
areas are hot while the drive is in use and immediately after being powered off.

1.6 Qualified Personnel

To allow trouble-free and safe operation of the unit, only qualified personnel with proven skills are allowed to transport, store, assemble,
install, program, commission, maintain, and decommission this equipment.

Persons with proven skills:

l Are qualified electrical engineers or persons who have received training from qualified electrical engineers and are suitably
experienced to operate devices, systems, plants, and machinery in accordance with pertinent laws and regulations.
l Are familiar with the basic regulations concerning health and safety/accident prevention.
l Have read and understood the safety guidelines given in all guides provided with the unit, especially the instructions given in the
operating guide of the drive.
l Have good knowledge of the generic and specialist standards applicable to the specific application.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 13

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2 Application Software Overview

2.1 iC2-Micro Application Software Overview
The application software is the default and standard software delivered with the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters. The features are briefly
described in the following sections:

l Basic Functions
l Controllers
l Protection Features
l Software Tools

2.2 Basic Functions

2.2.1 Basic Functions Overview
The application software consists of a wide range of basic features which enables the drive to control any application using the iC2-Micro
drive.

2.2.2 Reference Handling

References from multiple sources, matching the needs to control the application, are freely definable.

Reference sources are:

l Analog inputs
l Digital inputs either as pulse input
l Reference from a field bus
l Internal settings
l Local reference from control panel
l Built-in potentiometer on control panel

Reference signals can be added generating the reference to the frequency converter. The final reference is scaled from -100% to 100%.

2.2.3 Two Setups

The frequency converter offers 2 setups. Each setup can be parameterized independently to match various application needs.

Switching between setups is possible during operation, allowing fast changeover.

2.2.4 Ramps
Linear, Sine ramp, Sine 2 ramps are supported in the frequency converter. The linear ramps provide a constant acceleration. The Sine
ramps provides a non-linear acceleration with soft transition at start and end of the acceleration process.

2.2.5 Quick Stop

In some situations, it may be required to stop the application in a quick way. For this purpose, the drive supports a specific deceleration
ramp time from the synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM.

2.2.6 Limit Rotation Direction

The rotational direction of the motor can be preset to run in 1 direction only (clockwise or counterclockwise), avoiding unintended
rotation direction.

14 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2.2.7 Motor Phase Switch

If motor phase cables have been installed in an incorrect order during installation, the rotation direction can be changed. This eliminates
the need to change the order of motor phases.

2.2.8 Inching with Jogging Modes

The frequency converter has predefined speed settings for use during commissioning, maintenance, or service. The jogging-mode
operation is set at preset speed.

2.2.9 Frequency Bypass

Specific motor frequencies can be bypassed during operation. The feature helps to minimize and avoid mechanical resonance of the
machine, limiting vibration and noise of the system.

2.2.10 Automatic Restart

In case of a minor fault and trip, the drive can do an automatic restart, eliminating a manual reset of the drive. This enhances automated
operation in remotely controlled systems. Make sure that dangerous situations cannot occur when using automatic restart.

2.2.11 Flying Start

Flying start enables the drive to synchronize to a freely spinning motor, before taking control of the motor. Taking over control of
the motor at the actual speed minimizes mechanical stress to the system. For example, the feature is relevant in fan and centrifuge
applications.

2.2.12 Mains Dropout

In case of mains dropout, where the drive cannot continue operation, it is possible to select predefined actions, for example trip, coast, or
performing a controlled ramp down.

2.2.13 Kinetic Backup

Kinetic backup enables the drive to remain in control if there is sufficient energy in the system, for example, as inertia or when lowering a
load. This allows a controlled stop of the machine.

2.2.14 Resonance Damping

High-frequency motor resonance noise can be eliminated through the use of resonance damping. Both automatic and manually
selected frequency damping are available.

2.2.15 Mechanical Brake Control

In applications like simple hoists, palletizers, stereoscopic warehouse, or downhill conveyors, a mechanical brake is used to keep the load
at standstill, when the motor is not controlled by the drive or when power is turned off.

The mechanical brake control feature ensures a smooth transition between the mechanical brake and motor holding the load, by
controlling the activation and deactivation of the mechanical brake.

2.2.16 Controllers
The drive has 3 different controllers providing optimized control of the actual application. The controllers cover:

l Process control
l Speed control open loop
l Torque control open loop

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 15

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Process controller

The process controller can control a process, for example, in a system where a constant pressure, flow, or temperature is needed.
Feedback from the application is connected to the drive, providing the actual output value. The controller ensures that the output is
matching the reference provided by controlling the motor speed. The reference source and the feedback signals are converted and
scaled to the actual values controlled.

Speed controller

The open-loop speed control provides accurate control of the motors rotational speed.

In open-loop mode (without external feedback signal of the speed), there is no need for external sensors. The open-loop speed control
makes installation and commissioning easier, and eliminates the risk of defective sensors.

Torque controller

A built-in torque controller provides optimized control of torque and supports open-loop control.

2.3 IO Control and Readouts

Depending on the hardware configuration of the drive, digital and analog inputs, digital and analog outputs, and relay outputs are
available. The I/Os can be configured and used to control the application from the drive.

All I/Os can be used as remote I/O nodes, as they are all addressed by the fieldbus of the drive.

2.4 Motor Control Features

2.4.1 Motor Control Features Overview
The motor control covers a wide range of applications, control from the most basic applications to applications requiring high-
performance motor control.

2.4.2 Motor Types

The drive supports standard available motors like:

l Induction motors
l Permanent magnet motors

2.4.3 Load Characterstics

Different load characteristics are supported to match the actual application needs:

l Variable torque: Typical load characteristic of fans and centrifugal pumps, where the load is proportional to the square of the speed.
l Constant torque: Load characteristic used in machinery where torque is needed across the full speed range. Typical application
examples are conveyors, extruders, decanters, compressors, and winches.

2.4.4 Motor Control Principle

Different control principles can be selected to control the motor, matching the application needs:

l U/f control for special control

l VVC+ control for the general-purpose application needs

2.4.5 Motor Nameplate and Catalog

Typical motor data for the actual drive are preset from factory, allowing operation of most motors. During commissioning, actual motor
data are entered in the settings of the drive, optimizing the motor control.

16 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2.4.6 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) provides optimization of motor parameters for improved shaft performance. Based on motor
nameplate data and measurements of the motor at standstill, key motor parameters are being recalculated and used to fine tune the
motor control algorithm.

2.4.7 Automation Energy Optimization (AEO)

The Automatic Energy Optimizer (AEO) feature optimizes the control with focus on lowering energy consumption at the actual load
point.

2.5 Braking of Load

2.5.1 Braking of Load Overview
When braking the motor controlled by the drive, various functions can be used. The specific function is selected based on the application
and the needs for how fast it should be stopped.

2.5.2 Resistor Braking

In applications where fast or continuous braking is required, a drive fit with a brake chopper is typically used. Excess energy generated
by the motor during braking of the application will be dissipated in a connected brake resistor. Braking performance depends on the
specific drive rating and selected brake resistor.

2.5.3 Overvoltage Control (OVC)

If braking time is not critical or the load is varying, the overvoltage control (OVC) feature is used to control stopping the application. The
drive extends the ramp-down time when it is not possible to brake within the defined ramp-down period. The feature should not be
used in hoisting applications, high inertia systems, or where continuous braking is required.

2.5.4 DC Brake
When braking at low speed, the braking of the motor can be improved by using the DC brake feature. It adds a small DC current on top
of the AC current, slightly increasing the brake capability.

2.5.5 AC Brake
In applications with non-cyclic operation of the motor, AC braking can be used to shorten the braking time and is only supported for
induction motors. Excess energy is dissipated by increasing losses in the motor during braking.

2.5.6 DC Hold
DC hold provides a limited holding torque on the rotor at standstill.

2.5.7 Load Sharing

In some applications, 2 or more drives are controlling the application at the same time. If 1 of the drives is braking a motor, the excess
energy can be fed to the DC link of a drive driving a motor, with a reduction of the total energy consumption. This feature is useful in, for
examples, decanters and carding machines, where smaller power-sized drives operate in generator mode.

2.6 Protection Features

2.6.1 Grid Protections
The drive protects against conditions on the power grid that can affect proper operation.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 17

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The grid is monitored for phase imbalance and phase loss. If the imbalance exceeds internal limits, a warning is provided and the user
can initiate proper actions.

In case of an under- or overvoltage on the grid, the drive will provide a warning and stop operation if the situation remains or exceeds
critical limits.

2.6.2 Drive Protection Features

The drive is monitored and protected during operation.

Inbuilt temperature sensors measure the actual temperature and provide relevant information to protect the drive. If the temperature
exceeds its nominal temperature conditions, derating will be applied. If the temperature is outside the allowed operating range, the
drive will stop operation.

The motor current is continuously monitored on all 3 phases. In case of a short circuit between 2 phases or a fault to ground, the drive
will detect this and immediately turn off. If the output current is exceeding its nominal values during operation for longer periods than
allowed, the drive will stop and report overload alarm.

The DC-link voltage of the drive is monitored. If it exceeds critical levels, a warning is issued and the drive will stop. If the situation is not
resolved, the drive will issue an alarm.

2.6.3 Motor Protection Features

The drive provides various features to protect the motor and the application.

The output current measurement provides information to protect the motor. Overcurrent, short circuit, ground faults, and lost motor
phase connections can be detected and relevant protections initiated.

Monitoring of speed, current, and torque limits provides an additional protection of the motor and the application.

Locked rotor protection secures that the drive is not starting with a blocked rotor of the motor.

Motor thermal protection is provided either as a calculation of the motor temperature based on the actual load or by the means of
external temperature sensors, for example PTC.

2.6.4 Protection of Externally Connected Components

Externally connected options like brake resistors can be monitored.

Brake resistors are monitored for thermal overload, short circuit, and missing connection.

2.6.5 Automatic Derating

Automatic derating of the drive allows continued operation even if the nominal operation conditions are exceeded. Typical factors
affecting this are temperature, high DC-link voltage, high motor load, or operation close to 0 Hz. Derating is typically applied as a
reduction in switching frequency or change in switching pattern, resulting in lower thermal losses.

2.7 Monitoring Features

2.7.1 Monitoring Features Overview
The drive offers a wide range of monitoring features providing information of operation conditions, grid conditions, and drive historical
data. Access to this information helps out analyzing operational conditions and identification of faults.

2.7.2 Speed Monitoring

The motor speed can be monitored during operation. If the speed exceeds minimum and maximum limits, the user is notified and can
initiate appropriate actions.

18 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2.7.3 Event Log and Operational Counters

An event log provides access the latest registered faults, providing relevant information for analysis of what occurred in the drive.

Operational counters offer information about the drive usage. Values like operation hours, running hours, kWh used, number of power-
ups, overvoltages, and overtemperatures are examples of the readouts available.

2.8 Software Tools

2.8.1 Software Tools Overview
Danfoss offers a suite of desktop software tools which have been designed to provide easy operation and the highest level of
customization of AC drives.

APIs and the Danfoss Device Interface enable integration of the tools into proprietary systems and business processes. The MyDrive®
tools support the entire life cycle of the drive, from system design to service. Some of the tools are available free of charge, and some
require a subscription.

For more information about the MyDrive® tools, see MyDrive documentation.

2.8.2 MyDrive® Select

MyDrive® Select performs frequency converter sizing based on calculated motor load currents, ambient temperature, and current
limitations. The sizing results are available in graphical and numerical format, and include calculations of efficiency, power losses, and
inverter load currents. The resulting documentation is available in .pdf or .xls format, and can be imported to MyDrive® Harmonics for
evaluation of the harmonic distortion, or validation of compliance towards most recognized harmonic norms and recommendations.

MyDrive® Select is available as a web-based tool at select.mydrive.danfoss.com and as a mobile device app that can be downloaded from
app stores.

2.8.3 MyDrive® Harmonics

MyDrive® Harmonics estimate the benefits of adding harmonic mitigation solutions to an installation and calculates system harmonic
distortion. The evaluation can be done both for new installations and when extending an existing installation.

The free version provides a fast overview of the expected general performance of the system. The expert version of MyDrive® Harmonics
requires a subscription, which opens up more features, including the possibility to save and share harmonic projects, import projects
from MyDrive® Select, and the possibility to add Danfoss harmonic mitigation products.

2.8.4 MyDrive® ecoSmart™

MyDrive® ecoSmart™ determines the energy efficiency of the drive being used and the system efficiency class according to IEC 61800-9.

MyDrive® ecoSmart™ uses information about the selected motor, load points, and AC drive to calculate the efficiency class and part load
efficiency for a Danfoss AC drive, either for a free-standing drive (CDM), or a drive with a motor (PDS).

MyDrive® ecoSmart™ is available as a web-based tool at ecosmart.mydrive.danfoss.com and as a mobile device app that can be
downloaded from app stores.

2.8.5 MyDrive® Insight

MyDrive® Insight is a software tool for commissioning, engineering, and monitoring drives. MyDrive® Insight can be used to configure
parameters, upgrade software, and set up functional safety features and condition-based monitoring.

Making backups, restoring the system from a backup, and data logging within MyDrive® Insight support the use of a microSD card as
storage device.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 19

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3 User Interfaces and How to Configure

3.1 Overview of User Interfaces
To interact with the iC2-Micro drive, use either control panel as the direct interface or MyDrive® Insight which is a PC tool for more
advanced interaction with the drive.

The iC2-Micro drive has a control panel with a display, control buttons, and status indicators. Using MyDrive® Insight provides the ability
to access the drive remotely.

3.2 Control Panel

3.2.1 Overview of Control Panel
The chapter provides an overview about the different control panels, the related elements, important features and functionalities, and
quick guidance on how to use the control panel.

3.2.2 Control Panel and Control Panel 2.0 OP2

The drive has 2 types of control panels as follows:

l Control Panel: It is inbuilt and by default delivered with the drive. The Control Panel buttons and indicators are described in 3.2.3
Control Panel Buttons and Indicators.
l Control Panel 2.0 OP2: An optional (accessory) control panel which provides better user experience. This type of control panel
enables easy setup of the drive via parameters, monitoring of the drive status, and visualization of event notifications. The Control
Panel 2.0 OP2 buttons and indicators are described in 3.2.5 Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Buttons and Indicators.

A more detailed overview of Control Panel 2.0 OP2 is as follows:

l 2.03” monochromatic user interface.

l Visual LEDs to identify drive status.
l Control of the drive and easy switch between local and remote operations.
l Multilingual display which shows parameters, selections, and status more clearly.
l Parameter display supports alphanumeric, special characters, integers, floating points, choice lists, and commands to configure
application data.
l Parameter settings of the drive can be copied to other drives for easy commissioning.
l Installation on a cabinet door using a mounting kit option.

20 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.3 Control Panel Buttons and Indicators

15

e30bu992.10
MON LOC
1 PGM REV 14
TOR ST2

2 WARN READY FAULT

13

3 12
REM
4 OK LOC
11

10

5 9
RUN

6 7 8

Figure 1: Control Panel

1 Status indicators 2 Operating indicators

3 Home/Menu 4 Left

5 Stop/Reset 6 Up

7 Down 8 Run indicator

9 Start 10 Back

11 Remote/Local 12 OK

13 Potentiometer 14 Status indicators

15 Main display

Table 2: Operation Buttons and Potentiometer

Name Function

Home/Menu Toggles between status view and main menu.

Long press to access the shortcut menu for quickly reading and editing parameters.

Up/Down Switches status/parameter group/parameter numbers, and tunes the parameter values.

Left Moves the cursor 1 bit to the left.

Back Navigates to the previous step in the menu structure or cancels the setting during tuning parameter values.

OK Confirms the operation.

Remote/Local Toggles between the remote mode and local mode.

Start Starts the drive in local mode.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 21

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 2: Operation Buttons and Potentiometer (continued)

Name Function

Stop/Reset Stops the drive in local mode.

Resets the drive to clear a fault.

Potentiometer Changes the reference value when the reference value is selected as potentiometer.

Table 3: Status Indicator Lights

Name Function

MON On: The main display is showing the drive status.

PGM On: The drive is in programming status.

TOR On: The drive is in torque mode.

Off: The drive is in speed mode.

LOC On: The drive is in local mode.

Off: The drive is in remote mode.

REV On: The drive is in reverse direction.

Off: The drive is in forward direction.

ST2 Refer to Table 6.

Table 4: Operating Indicator Lights

Name Function

WARN Steadily lit when a warning occurs.

READY Steadily lit when the drive is ready.

FAULT Flashes when a fault occurs.

Table 5: Run Indicator Light

Name Function

RUN On: The drive is in normal operation.

Off: The drive has stopped.

Flash: In the motor-stopping process; or the drive received a RUN command, but no frequency output.

Table 6: Multiple Setups Indicator Light

ST2 Off On Flash Flash quickly

Active setup(1) Setup 1 Setup 2 Setup 1 Setup 2

Programming setup(2) Setup 1 Setup 2 Setup 2 Setup 1

1) Select active setup in parameter P 6.6.1 Active Setup.

2) Select programming setup in parameter P 6.6.2 Active Setup.

22 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.4 Control Panel Basic Configuration

3.2.4.1 Overview of Control Panel Basic Configuration
Basic configurations of the control panel include:

l Readout status of the motor and the drive which includes warnings and faults.
l Navigate to the menus to view or change parameter settings for the drive.

After the drive is powered up, press the Home/Menu button to toggle between status display and main menu. Use the Up/Down buttons
to select items, and press OK button to confirm selection.

Status Display Main Menu

e30bv048.10
(MON status indicator light is on) (PGM status indicator light is on)

Reference P4.2.1.1 Motor Type

Setting Q1: Motor Data
(Hz)(1)

*[0] IM Motor PM Motor

Output [1] SPM or [3] IPM
Frequency
(Hz) P4.2.2.1 Nominal Power
P4.2.2.3 Nominal Current
P4.2.2.2 Nominal Voltage
P4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed
P4.2.2.3 Nominal Current
Motor P4.2.3.7 Motor Cont.
P4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequ-
Current Rated Torque
ency
Quick P4.2.4.1 Back EMF
(A) P4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed
Access P4.2.1.2 Number of Poles
P4.2.1.2 Number of Poles

Torque
(Nm)
P4.2.1.3 AMA Mode(4)

P5.4.1 Application Selection

Udc
Q2:
Application
Voltage
Selection *[20] Speed Control Mode
(V) [21] Process Control Mode
[22] Multi Speed Control Mode
[23] 3-wire Control Mode
Power [24] Torque Control Mode
(kW)
P5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum
P5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum
P5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time
Reference P5.5.4.3 Ramp 1 Decel. Time
(%)(2) Q3:
Motor P2.3.14 Max Output Frequency
Control P5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit
Full
Parameters
Parameter group 1st level:
Customer
G1 Grid
Readout
G2 Power Conversion & DC-link
(Unit)(3) G3 Filters & Brake Chopper
Events G4 Motor
Information G5 Application
Feedback G6 Maintenance & Service
Faults
(Unit)(2)(3) G8 Customization
G9 I/O
G10 Connectivity

Note: (1) Local mode only. (2) Remote mode only. (3) The status is only shown when the corresponding function is enabled. (4) For AMA
execution, refer to chapter Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). If parameter P5.4.3 Motor Control Principle is set as [0] U/f, no need to execute AMA.

Figure 2: Operation with Control Panel

3.2.4.2 Understanding Readout Screens

When the drive is in ready state, the control panel display shows the Home screen in the main display. By default, as a factory setting, the
Home screen shows the reference setting in local mode, as shown in the figure below.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 23

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bj954.10
Figure 3: Home Screen

Press Up/Down buttons of the control panel to toggle between the readout items.

Readouts in Local mode: The following readouts can be accessed from the control panel status menu in Local mode.

l Reference Setting (Hz)

l Output Frequency (Hz)
l Motor Current (A)
l Torque (Nm)
l Udc Voltage (V)
l Power (kW)
l Customer Readout (Unit)*

Readouts in Remote mode: The following readouts cab be accessed from the control panel status menu in Remote mode.

l Output Frequency (Hz)

l Motor Current (A)
l Torque (Nm)
l Udc Voltage (V)
l Power (kW)
l Reference (%)
l Customer Readout (Unit)*
l Feedback (Unit)*

* indicates that the status is only shown when the corresponding function is enabled.

3.2.4.3 Menu Group Screen and Navigation

3.2.4.3.1 Overview of Menu Group Screen and Navigation

Using the Home/Menu button allows to toggle between readout screens and parameter group screen.

The Menu consists of the following:

l Quick Access: A start-up wizard to easy configuration of motor settings and starting the motor. Using quick access enables to set up
motor data, application selection setups, and motor control settings in a step-by-step method.
l All Parameters: To view all the parameters in the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters.
l Events Information: To view all active and history events such as faults, in the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters.
Press the Up/Down button of the control panel to select the menu functions, as shown in the figure below.
e30bj955.11

Quick Access All Parameters Events Information

Figure 4: Menu Functions

24 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.4.3.2 Quick Access Navigation

Quick Access consists of the following 3 functions to set up the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters easily in a step-by-step prescribed
manner.

l q1 - Motor Data Setting: Enables to first select motor type, followed by motor data entry based on motor nameplate.

NOTICE
After completing the motor data settings, it is recommended to execute Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA), if P 5.4.3 Motor
Control Principle is set as [1] VVC+.

See AMA procedure in 5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).

l q2 - Application Selection: Enables to select typical application configurations. The application selections are pre-configured
parameter settings. 5 preset common applications are supported in iC2-Micro frequency converter, which are
¢ Speed control mode
¢ Process control mode
¢ Multi-speed control mode
¢ 3-wire control mode
¢ Torque control mode
For more information, see 5.5.1 Application Selection Overview.

NOTICE
To optimize application configuration, configure essential changes to the parameter based on the required application selection

l q3 - Motor Control Setting: Enables setting of the motor control data which influence motor operation performance, such as ramp-
up time and down time, reference limit, and so on.
The following figure shows the setting procedure when using Quick Access to start the motor.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 25

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bk031.10
P4.2.1.1 Motor Type

q1: Motor Data

*[0] IM Motor PM Motor

[1] SPM or [3] IPM

P4.2.2.1 Nominal Power P4.2.2.3 Nominal Current

P4.2.2.2 Nominal Voltage P4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed
P4.2.2.3 Nominal Current P4.2.3.7 Motor Cont. Rated
P4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency Torque
P4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed P4.2.4.1 Back EMF
P4.2.1.2 Number of Poles P4.2.1.2 Number of Poles

Quick
Access P4.2.1.3 AMA

P5.4.1 Application Selection

q2: Application
Selection *[20] Speed Control Mode
[21] Process Control Mode
[22] Multi Speed Control Mode
[23] 3-wire Control Mode
[24] Torque Control Mode

P5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum

P5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum
P5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time
P5.5.4.3 Ramp 1 Decel. Time
q3: Motor P2.3.14 Max Output Frequency
Control P5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit

Figure 5: Quick Access Functions

3.2.4.3.3 Parameter Group Screen and Navigation

Overview

Press the Up/Down buttons to select the all parameters menu. See overview of full parameters in 3.2.4.3.1 Overview of Menu Group
Screen and Navigation. Press OK to enter the sub-menus.

To navigate through and within the different parameter groups, use the navigation buttons of the control panel.

l Use the Up/Down button of the control panel to navigate to different parameter groups.
l The Back button is used to navigate to a level higher and the OK button to a level lower in the parameter/parameter group screens.
Figure 6 shows how to navigate to a parameter and the example considered is P 2.3.1 Overvoltage Controller Enable.
e30bj975.10

OK OK

OK

Figure 6: Parameter Navigation

26 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Changing Selections in a Parameter

In this example, the P 5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selector is considered.

Figure 7 shows an overview of the relevant screens when changing the selections in a parameter.

e30bj976.10
OK OK

OK

Figure 7: Changing Selections in a Parameter

1. Press the Up/Down buttons to go to the parameter.

2. Press OK to view the current selection setting.
3. Press OK to modify selection.

 The selection numbers begin to flash.

4. Use the Up/Down button to browse through the selection numbers.
5. Press OK at the required selection number.

 The flash stops.

Changing Parameter Value

In this example, the P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time is considered.

Figure 8 shows an overview of the relevant screens when changing the value of a parameter.
e30bj977.10

OK OK

OK

Figure 8: Changing Parameter Value

1. Press the Up/Down button to go to the parameter.

2. Press OK to view the current parameter value.
3. Press OK again to change the value of parameter.

The last bit of the value flashes and shows the location of the cursor.

4. To move the cursor to the left, use the left arrow button of the control panel.

The flashing indicates the active location of the cursor, at the digit.

5. Use the Up/Down buttons of the control panel to increase or decrease the value of the digit where the cursor is active.
6. Press OK to confirm the changes.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 27

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.4.4 Restoring Default Settings

3.2.4.4.1 Overview
Restoring the default parameter settings is done by initialization of the drive. Initialization is carried out via P 6.6.8 Operation Mode
(recommended) or manually.

Recommended initialization via P 6.6.8 Operation Mode does not reset the following settings:

l Operating hours.
l Serial communication selections.
l Fault log.
l Other monitoring functions.
l P 1.2.1 Regional Settings.
l P 4.4.1.4 Clockwise Direction.

Manual initialization erases all data related to motor, programming, localization, monitoring, and restores factory default settings.
Manual initialization does not reset the following information:

l P 1.2.1 Regional Settings.

l P 4.4.1.4 Clockwise Direction.
l P 6.1.2 Operating hours.
l P 6.1.5 Power Up's.
l P 6.1.6 Over Temp's.
l P 6.1.7 Over Volt's.

3.2.4.4.2 Recommended Initialization (via parameters)

1. Select P 6.6.8 Operation Mode and press OK.
2. Select [2] Initialisation and press OK.
3. Remove power to the unit and wait until the display turns off.
4. Apply power to the unit. Default parameter settings are restored during start-up. This may take slightly longer than normal.
5. Fault 80, Drive initialised to default value is shown.
6. Press Stop/Reset to return to operating mode.

3.2.4.4.3 Manual Initialization

1. Remove power to the unit and wait until the display turns off.
2. Press and hold Home/Menu, and OK buttons at the same time, while applying power to the unit.

Factory default parameter settings are restored during start-up. This may take slightly longer than normal.

28 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.2.5 Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Buttons and Indicators

e30bv123.10
1

11

2 10

4 9

5 8

6 7

Figure 9: Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Overview

Table 7: Control Panel Elements Description

Legend Name of element Description

1 Display Provides access to content and settings. The display provides detailed information about the sta-
tus of the drive.

2 Home/Menu • Toggles between status view and main menu.

• Long press to access the shortcut menu for quickly reading and editing parameters.

3 Arrows and [OK] • Arrows: Navigate within the different screens and menus, and tune the parameter values.
• [OK]: Confirms selections and data in the control panel display.

4 Info Provides drive information by pressing the Info button from the home screen, for example, the
drive type, ordered model code, drive serial number, application version.

5 Stop/Reset Stops the operation of the drive.

6 OFF LED The indicator has the following states:

• Steady on: The indicator is in this state when:
- The drive is not modulating and the drive is coasted.
- The stop or coast signal is applied. Ramp times, protections, and stopping functions might
prolong this state.
• Off: The drive is in operation, a start signal is applied, and the output is active. This also
includes ramping, running on reference, and AMA.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 29

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 7: Control Panel Elements Description (continued)

Legend Name of element Description

7 RUN LED The indicator has the following states:

• On: The drive is in normal operation.
• Off: The drive has stopped.
• Flash: The indicator is in this state when:
- In the motor-stopping process (ramp down).
- The drive received a RUN command, but no frequency output.

8 Run Starts the operation of the drive.

9 REM/LOC Toggles the drive between remote and local operation.

10 Back Navigates to previously viewed screen or a menu level above the current menu.

11 Drive Status Indica- The related LEDs indicate the status of the drive.
tors • [WARN]: A steady yellow light indicates a warning.
• [READY]: A steady green light indicates that the drive is ready.
• [FAULT]: A flashing red light indicates a fault.

3.2.6 Control Panel 2.0 OP2 Basic Configurations

3.2.6.1 Overview
Basic configurations of the control panel include:

l Readout status of the motor and the drive which includes warnings and faults.
l Navigate to the menus in order to view or change parameter settings for the drive.

3.2.6.2 Understanding Readout Screens

When the drive is in ready state, the control panel 2.0 OP2 display shows the Home screen. By default, as a factory setting, the Home
screen is shown as follows.

2 3
e30bv141.10

1 1(1) 50.0 Hz LOC 4

0.0Hz 5

Frequency 6

Figure 10: Home Screen

The following are the legends and description of the Home screen.

30 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 8: Legend Table

Legend Description

1 • The front number indicates active setup.(1)

• The number in brackets indicates the programming setup.(2)

2 • On Readout Screens, the value with unit after the setpoint icon is the reference setting data.
• On Menu Screens, the value with unit (no setpoint icon) is the output data.

3 Direction icon: indicates the direction of motor rotation.

4 LOC/REM: indicates local or remote control mode.

• LOC: local control mode.
• REM: remote control mode.

5 Middle value: indicates the readouts value.

6 Readout type

1) Select active setup in P 6.6.1 Active Setup.

2) Select programming setup in P 6.6.2 Programming Setup.

Readout type selection

Press the up and down arrow on the Control Panel 2.0 OP2 when in the Readout Screen. The control panel screen navigates to the readout
items in order. See 3.2.4.2 Understanding Readout Screens.

Reference setting in local mode

In local mode, press the OK button on Readout Screen to enter the reference setting. The reference value is valid immediately via pressing
up, down, and left arrows for setting.
e30bv142.10

1(1) 35.6 Hz LOC

R eference
35.6 Hz

Figure 11: Setting the Reference Value

3.2.6.3 Menu Screen and Navigation

Use the Home/Menu button to toggle between Readouts Screen and Menu Screen.
e30bv143.10

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Menu
Quick Access
All Parameters
Figure 12: Menu Screen

Main menu includes different functions which are shown in the following table.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 31

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 9: Menu Screen

Menu Function

Quick Access Quick access for setting up a drive quickly. See 3.2.4.3.2 Quick Access Navigation.

All Parameters View and set the parameters.

Events Event list (including fault and warning that has occurred in the drive).

Display Setting Set language and adjust the display backlight.

Backup & Restore Backup and restore the drive information.

Basic navigation handling techniques

l To navigate through and within the different functionalities or parameter groups, use the navigation buttons of the Control Panel
2.0 OP2.
l Use the Back button to navigate to a higher level, and the OK button to navigate to a lower level.

3.2.6.4 Parameter Group Screens and Overall Navigation

All Parameters menu includes all parameters for configuration. A typical parameter group screen is shown as below.

1
e30bv144.10

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

2 All Parameters
4
1 Grid
3
2 Power conversion & DC
Figure 13: Parameter Group Screen

The following information is contained in the parameter group screen:

Table 10: Legend Table

Legend Description

1 Control state of the drive. The value in the middle without setpoint icon shows the output frequency.

2 Name of the menu, group, and parameter that is currently active in the drive.

3 Group, sub-group, or parameter list.

4 Scrollbar

3.2.6.5 Changing Selections in a Parameter

In this example, the parameter P 5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selectoris considered. When a parameter has selections, a black highlight is active
on the parameter index and name, as shown.

32 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bv145.10
1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp
5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selec
5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time
Figure 14: Changing Selections in a Parameter

1. To view the selections of the parameter, press OK. The selections available for the parameter is shown. A tick icon in the front of the
selection indicates the selected choice.
e30bv146.10

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp 1 Type Selector

0 Linear
1 Sine Ramp
Figure 15: Selections in a Parameter (Example)

2. Use the up or down arrow to browse through the selections.

e30bv147.10

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp 1 Type Selector

0 Linear
1 Sine Ramp
Figure 16: Browsing through the Selections (Example)

3. Press OK at the required selection. The tick icon is moved to this selection.
e30bv148.10

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp 1 Type Selector

0 Linear
1 Sine Ramp
Figure 17: Confirming the Selections (Example)

3.2.6.6 Changing Parameter Value

In the example, the parameter P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time is considered and Figure 18 show the change of value from 3 s to 5 s.

1. Go to the parameter P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time and press the OK button.

2. Press the OK button again to enter value edit screen. To go to the values before or after the decimals, use the left or right arrow button.
A black highlight on the digit indicates the location where the cursor is active.

3. Use the up or down arrow button of the Control Panel 2.0 OP2 to increase or decrease the value.

4. Press OK to confirm the changes.

Figure 18 shows all the screens relevant to change the value of a parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 33

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

1-(1) 1-(2)

e30bv149.10
1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC 1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC
Ramp Ramp 1 Accel. Time
5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selec
3.00 s
5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time

2-(1) 2-(2)

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC 1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp 1 Accel. Time Ramp 1 Accel. Time
0003.00 s 0003.00 s

3 4

1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC 1(1) 0.0 Hz LOC

Ramp 1 Accel. Time Ramp 1 Accel. Time
0005.00 s 5.00 s

Figure 18: Changing Value in a Parameter

3.3 MyDrive® Insight

3.3.1 Overview of MyDrive® Insight
MyDrive® Insight is a platform-independent software tool that supports the commissioning, engineering, and monitoring of iC2-Micro
Frequency Converters. Some of the key features include:

l Fast and easy configuration and commissioning.

l Monitor the drives as part of daily operations.
l Collect data and information for troubleshooting, maintenance, and service.
l Discovery of and access to multiple drives in a network.
l Intuitive user interface.
l Notifications and visualizations on real-time information and events about the drive.
l PC control to perform operations such as starting or stopping the drive, set references, set direction, reset, and coast of the drive.
l Perform updates on single drives.
l Backup and restore of parameter settings.
l Data logging and analyzing for troubleshooting.

NOTICE
The section is documented for MyDrive® Insight version 2.13.0 or above. Make sure to uninstall lower versions of MyDrive® Insight
from your device to use the latest MyDrive® Insight functions.

NOTICE
The section MyDrive® Insight in the application guide covers basic information such as getting started with MyDrive® Insight,
accessing and viewing or changing the parameters, and PC control to operate the drive using MyDrive® Insight. For further
information on the different MyDrive screens, integrated help within MyDrive® Insight will be available in future releases.

34 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

3.3.2 Getting Started with MyDrive® Insight

As a prerequisite, ensure that MyDrive® Insight is installed on the device (PC or laptop). Download and install MyDrive® Insight from
MyDrive® Suite available at https://suite.mydrive.danfoss.com/.

1. To establish a point-to-point connection between the drive and the device, use either of the following 2 methods:
– Connect signal wires to RS485 terminals as described on the backside of the cover plate. A conventional adapter can be used
for connecting to device USB port.
– Use the RJ45 port on the drive by using an accessory adapter and cable to connect the drive with the device USB port.

NOTICE
Via the first connection method, full functionalities from MyDrive® Insight are supported, including firmware upgrading and PC
control for operations.

NOTICE
Via the second connection method, only limited functionalities are available, for example, parameter configuration, parameter/
project backup and restore, commissioning, monitoring, and diagnosing.
l For the second connection method, use the fixed baud rate 115200 and address 1.

2. After powering up the drive and when the drive is in Ready state, open MyDrive® Insight on the device.
3. Click Direct Connect icon, as shown.
e30bk164.11

Figure 19: Establish Connection

4. Set the connection type to Serial and select the serial port that the drive was connected to. Use the correct baud rate and
address that are set on the drive.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 35

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bk061.11
Figure 20: Serial Connection

5. Once the connection is established, the Device Info view is shown.

3.3.3 Accessing Parameters and Understanding Parameter Screens in MyDrive® Insight

Accessing parameters

1. To access the parameters of the connected drive, click Setup & Service. This opens the menus related to Setup & Service.

2. Click Parameters → Live, as shown.

36 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bv193.10

Figure 21: Setup & Service

Parameter screen overview

Following is an overview of the Parameter (Live) screen in MyDrive® Insight, which describes the Parameter screen.

e30bk060.11

Figure 22: Parameter Screen

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 37

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 11: Legend Table

Legend Name Description

1 Parameter group Navigate through the different parameter groups in the drive.

2 Search button To find a specific parameter.

3 Value field View and change a parameter value or selection. On the Live screen, all the parameters for the drive
are shown in MyDrive® Insight.

4 PC control button Switch to PC control to start or stop the drive, using MyDrive® Insight.

Navigate through different parameter groups

In this example, parameter group 4 Motor is considered, as shown.

Figure 23: Navigating to a Parameter Group

1. Click the parameter group from All Parameters screen.

2. Click the parameter subgroup.

3. Repeat step 2, until the right level of parameter subgroup is reached to find the specific parameters (4).

NOTICE
When in a specific parameter subgroup, only parameters relevant to the parameter subgroup can be accessed.

Searching for a specific parameter

1. In the Search field, type the required keyword. A keyword can be the name of a parameter group, a parameter subgroup, or a specific
parameter name or parameter number.

In the example, motor control is considered. The parameter group and the specific parameter can be accessed from the search results.

38 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Figure 24: Search Button

3.3.4 Viewing and Changing Parameter Settings

When in a specific parameter group, all parameters related to the parameter group are shown. Depending on the access type of the
parameter, there is a possibility to view the parameter setting or change the current selection or value of the parameter.

In the example, parameter group 4 Motor is considered, as shown.

e30bk169.11

Figure 25: Parameter Overview

Table 12: Legend Table

Number Field Name Description

1 Index Based on the parameter group structure, the index defines the location of the parameter. The index
is not used as a unique identifier of a parameter.

2 Name Name of the parameter.

3 Parameter status Provides the current status or value of a parameter. The parameter which is shown in a light gray
or value color cannot be changed.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 39

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 12: Legend Table (continued)

Number Field Name Description

4 Selection para- To see all selections available for the parameter, click the value in the Value field.
meters

5 Default The factory setting (default value) of the parameter.

6 Range of para- The parameter value can be modified based on the ranges defined (maximum and minimum val-
meters ues).

7 Unit When applicable, the user unit of the parameter is shown in the Unit field.

8 Number Parameter number (PUN) is the unique identifier of a parameter for modbus registers. See 6.1.6.2.8
Parameter Number (PNU).

9 Help Click the ? button to see description about the parameter. For more detailed descriptions, see 7.1
Reading the Parameter Table.

10 Favorite To add parameters to Favorites, click the button.

11 Edit and reset Use the 3 dots icon to select the required column types or reset all columns. The columns sequence
columns could be changed with click, hold, and drag.

3.3.5 PC Control to Operate the Drive using MyDrive® Insight

To operate the drive using PC control, click control panel button in MyDrive® Insight. Figure 26 shows the different screens to operate the
drive via MyDrive® Insight.

40 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bk170.11
Figure 26: Operate Drive using MyDrive® Insight

To access PC Control in MyDrive® Insight and operate the drive, perform the following:
1. Click the REQUEST CONTROL button.
2. Click Continue, to confirm secure operation conditions, while controlling the drive using MyDrive® Insight.
3. Use the START, STOP, STOP COAST buttons to perform a drive operation.
4. Increase or decrease the reference speed.
5. In case of a fault event, click RESET FAULTS to reset a drive.

3.3.6 Backing Up the Drive

1. To back up the drive, select a drive, go to Setup & Services → Parameters.

 The Parameters Live screen appears.

2. Click the icon as shown in the figure.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 41

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bv194.10
Figure 27: Backup Destination Icon

 This opens a screen to select the backup destination. The destinations for backup are:
¢ Project: Backup an existing project or a new project.
e30bv206.10

Figure 28: Backup Destination

3. Click Next. Using the screen, it is possible to specify a name for the backup file.
4. Click Backup to begin backup.

 Once backup is completed, a screen appears with a notification. If a project backup is created, the backup is shown in
the device menu under Parameters.

42 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bv207.10

Figure 29: Backup File in the Menu

3.3.7 Restoring the Data to the Drive

1. To restore data to the drive, select a drive, go to Setup & Service→Parameters.
2. Click the icon as shown in the image below.

e30bv195.11

Figure 30: Restore Data Icon

3. Select the source project of the data which has to be restored to the drive.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 43

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bk167.11
Figure 31: Source of Data for Restore

4. Click Next, and select a backup source drive.

5. Click Next and select a backup.
6. Select the content for restoring data into the drive, and click Next.

 On successful restore of data, a message is shown.

e30bv208.10

Figure 32: Restoring Done

44 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

4 Application Software Structure and Overview

4.1 Understanding Application Software Structure
The basic design principle of the application software structure and the related hierarchy refers to the setup of a typical iC2-Micro drive,
as shown in the Figure 33.

e30bj964.10
6 Maintenance & Service

5 Application

3 Filters & Brake Chopper

1 Grid 4 Motor
2 Power
Conversion & DC-link

8 Customization 9 I/O

10 Connectivity

Figure 33: Application Menu Overview

4.2 Parameter Groups, Related Content, and Settings

l All generic settings such as Grid, Power Conversion and DC-link, Filters & Brake Chopper, and Motor are accessed via parameter
groups (menu indexes) 1–4.
l Most of the application-specific parameters are accessed via parameter groups (menu index) 5 Application.
l Features and functions related to the application such as Maintenance & Service and Customization are in parameter groups (menu
indexes) 6 and 8 respectively.
l The basic setup for external control signals and communication interfaces is done in parameter groups (menu indexes) 9 and 10
respectively.
l Features and related parameters are grouped in individual parameter groups. Each feature has a parameter group of its own.
l Status information for each parameter group is available separately for easy access.

The following table provides information about the parameter groups.

Menu index/Parameter group Parameter group name Description

1 Grid Contains parameters for configuring, monitoring, and controlling the

energy source of the drive system. Typically, the energy source is the
grid. The menu also allows to configure grid protection settings and
view the condition of the grid.

2 Power Conversion Contains parameters to configure, monitor, and control the power
conversion of the drive. The menu allows to configure protection
settings of the power unit and settings for the rectifier, DC link, and
inverter.

3 Filters & Brake Chopper Contains parameters to configure, monitor, and control the filters,
brake chopper, and brake resistors.

4 Motor Contains parameters to configure motor, motor control, and motor

protection.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 45

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Menu index/Parameter group Parameter group name Description

5 Application Contains parameters for application specific features such as process

control, speed control, torque control, mechanical brake control, and
many more.

6 Maintenance & Service Contains parameters exclusively related to status, events, and service
features.

8 Customization Contains parameters to customize readouts.

9 I/O Contains parameters to configure digital or analog I/O.

10 Connectivity Parameters to configure the communication of the drive system.

46 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

 Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group Parameter group
1st level 2nd level 1st level 2nd level 1st level 2nd level 1st level 2nd level

1 Grid 1.2 Grid Settings 4 Motor 4.1 Status 5 Application 5.1 Status 6 Maintenance & 6.1 Status
Service

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03

1.3 Grid Protection 4.2 Motor Data 5.2 Protection 6.2 Software
Information

Figure 34: Parameter Groups

4.4 Motor 5.4 Operation 6.5 Cooling Fan
Control Mode

4.6 Protection 5.5 Control 6.6 Parameter

Handling

2 Power 2.1 Status 5.6 Start Settings 6.7 Drive

Conversion & Identification
DC-link
2.3 Protection 5.7 Stop Settings
Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

8 Customization 8.1 Custom

2.4 Modulation 5.8 Speed Control Readout

8.4 Smart Logic

2.5 DC-Link Control 5.9 Inching Controller

2.7 Output Current 5.10 Torque

Limit Control
9 I/O 9.3 I/O Status
5.11 Mechanical
3 Filters & Brake 3.1 Status Brake Control
9.4 Digital Inputs/
Chopper Outputs
5.12 Process
3.2 Brake Control
9.5 Analog Inputs/
Chopper Outputs
5.27 Fieldbus
3.3 Brake Process Data
Resistor

10 Connectivity 10.1 FC Port

Settings

10.2 FC Port
Diagnostics

AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 47
e30bj943.11
Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

5 Configuration Setup Examples

5.1 Introduction & Prerequisite
The section covers the basic configuration steps of a drive. Use the following topics as reference during the drive configuration/
commissioning process:

l For control panel related information, see 3.2.4.1 Overview of Control Panel Basic Configuration.
l For information on using MyDrive® Insight, see 3.3.1 Overview of MyDrive® Insight.
l Detailed information about the parameters is described in Chapter Parameter Descriptions.
A typical wiring schematic for iC2-Micro Frequency Converters is shown.

1)
L1/L U
L2 V
Power L3/N W
input
PE PE
Motor

2) UDC-
Switch mode
power supply
UDC+/BR+ Brake
24 V DC 10 V DC resistor
A=Analog, D=Digital
BR-
3)
12 (+24 V OUT)
4)
13 (D IN) P9.4.1.1
24 V (NPN) Relay 1
0 V (PNP)
14 (D IN) 03
24 V (NPN)
250 V AC, 2 A
0 V (PNP) 02
15 (D IN/OUT)
24 V (NPN)
0 V (PNP) 01
24 V
5)
S640
ON = Terminated
1 2

ON

0V
17 (D IN) OFF = Open
24 V (NPN)
5V
0 V (PNP)
18 (D IN)
24 V (NPN)
0 V (PNP)
20 (COM I/O) 0V
S640

RS485 (N RS485) 69 RS485

interface
Analog output 31 (A OUT) (P RS485) 68
0/4-20 mA
32 (+10 V OUT) (COM RS485) 61
+ 10 V DC

0-10 V DC 33 (A IN)
0/4-20 mA
0-10 V DC 34 (A IN)
0/4-20 mA
e30bv083.12

35 (COM I/O) RS485 communication

RJ45 port

Figure 35: Wiring Diagram

48 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

1 Single DC choke in MA05a.

2 Built-in brake chopper is only applicable to drives in the power range of 3x380–480 V 2.2 kW (3.0 hp) and above, and 3x200–
240 V 1.5 kW (2 hp) and above.

3 No BR terminals for 1x100–120 V, 1x200–240 V, 3x200–240 V 0.37–0.75 kW (0.5–1.0 hp), and 3x380-480 V 0.37-1.5 kW (0.5-2.0
hp) drives.

4 Select the PNP or NPN mode via parameter P 9.4.1.1 Digital I/O mode (PNP=Source, NPN=Sink).

5 Use switch S640 (bus terminal) to enable termination on the RS485 port (terminals 68 and 69).

5.2 Basic Setup of a Drive

The procedure covers the basic set-up of a drive.

Prerequisite:

l Ensure that the drive is mounted safely as described in the iC2-Micro Frequency Converters Operating Guide.
l To use MyDrive® Insight for configuration, install MyDrive® Insight from MyDrive Suite app.

The basic setup of a drive consists of the following configuration steps.

1. Configuring the grid and power unit settings (grid type and voltage class).
2. Setting the operation mode.
3. Configuring the control place.
4. Configuring the field communication, if applicable.

The steps described in detail are as follows:

1. Configure the grid settings using the following parameter.

Parameter index Parameter name Example setting Parameter number

1.2.2 Grid Type [12] 380-440V/50Hz 6

2. Configure the operation mode using the following parameter.

Parameter index Parameter name Example setting Parameter number

5.4.2 Operation Mode [0] Speed Open Loop 100

3. Configure the control place settings using the following parameters.

Parameter index Parameter name Example setting Parameter number

5.5.1.1 Control Site [0] Digital and Ctrl. Word 801

5.5.1.2 Control Source [1] FC Port 802

5.5.3.5 Reference Function [0] Sum 304

5.5.3.6 Reference Site [0] Linked to Loc/Rem 313

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [2] Analog Input 34 316

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 49

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter index Parameter name Example setting Parameter number

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [11] Local Bus Reference 317

5.5.2.1 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR 850

5.5.2.2 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR 851

5.5.2.4 Start Select [3] Logic OR 853

5.5.2.5 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR 854

9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [8] Start 510

9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [10] Reversing 511

9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [14] Jog 513

5.3 Setting up the Drive using Quick Access via Control Panel
The following steps shows the quick access setup.

1. Power up the drive.

2. Press Home/Menu button on the control panel for accessing the menu structure.
3. Select QACC, and enter q1 Motor Data to first select motor type using P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type.
4. Set the value of motor data parameters, in sequence, based on the selected motor type.
5. Execute Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA), if needed. See 5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
6. Select application type in q2 Application Selection and wiring I/O terminals accordingly. For more information, see 5.5.1
Application Selection Overview.
7. Enter q3 Motor Control to configure reference limitations, output limitations, and ramp time.
8. Press REM/LOC, to set the drive in remote operation.
9. To start the drive by I/O terminals.

5.4 Motor Configuration

5.4.1 Motor Configuration Overview
The setup examples in this chapter describe motor configuration.

NOTICE
The parameters specified in motor configuration, cannot be adjusted when the motor is running.

The configuration setup contains, menu index, parameter name, recommended parameter setting, and parameter number. The
parameter number is a unique identification reference for the parameter. For detailed description on a parameter, refer Chapter
Parameter Descriptions.

5.4.2 Asynchronous Motor Setup

1. For asynchronous motor setup, set the following parameters:

50 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended setting Parameter number

4.2.2.1 Nominal Power As shown on nameplate. 120

4.2.2.2 Nominal Voltage As shown on nameplate. 122

4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency As shown on nameplate. 123

4.2.2.3 Nominal Current As shown on nameplate. 124

4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed As shown on nameplate. 125

2. Set following parameters for optimum performance in VVC+ mode, extra motor data is required to set up the following
parameters.

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended setting Parameter number

4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance (Rs) As shown on motor 130

datasheet.

4.2.3.2 Rotor Resistance (Rr) As shown on motor 131

datasheet.

4.2.3.4 Stator Leakage Reactance As shown on motor 133

X1 datasheet.

4.2.3.6 Main Reactance Xh As shown on motor 135

datasheet.

VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations, it provides optimum performance without further adjustments.
Run a complete AMA for best performance. See 5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).

5.4.3 PM Motor Setup in VVC+

Prerequisites

1. Set P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type to the following options to activate PM motor operation:
¢ [1] PM, Non-salient SPM or [3] PM, Salient IPM.
2. Select [0] Speed Open Loop in P 5.4.2 Operation Mode.

Procedure

1. Set the following parameters using the motor name plate and motor datasheet.

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended setting Parameter number

4.2.2.3 Nominal Current As shown on motor datasheet. 124

4.2.3.7 Motor Cont. Rated Torque As shown on motor datasheet. 126

4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed As shown on motor datasheet. 125

4.2.1.2 Number of Poles As shown on motor datasheet. 139

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 51

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended setting Parameter number

4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance (Rs) Enter line-to-common stator 130

winding resistance (Rs). If only
line-to-line data is available,
divide the line-to-line value
by 2 to achieve the line-to-
common (starpoint) value. It is
also possible to measure the
value with an ohmmeter, which
also takes the resistance of the
cable into account. Divide the
measured value by 2 and enter
the result.

4.2.4.3 d-axis Inductance (Ld) Enter line-to-common direct 137

axis inductance of the PM
motor. If only line-to-line data is
available, divide the line-to-line
value by 2 to achieve the line-
to-common (starpoint) value. It
is also possible to measure the
value with an inductance meter,
which also takes the inductance
of the cable into account. Divide
the measured value by 2 and
enter the result.

4.2.4.1 Back EMF Enter line-to-line back EMF 140

of the PM motor at 1000
RPM mechanical speed (RMS
value). Back EMF is the voltage
generated by a PM motor
when no frequency converter
is connected and the shaft is
turned externally. Back EMF is
normally specified for nominal
motor speed or for 1000 RPM
measured between 2 lines. If the
value is not available for a motor
speed of 1000 RPM, calculate
the correct value as follows: For
example, if back EMF at 1800
RPM is 320 V, the back EMF at
1000 RPM is:
Back EMF=(Voltage/
RPM)x1000=(320/1800)x1000=1
78.

VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations, it provides optimum performance without further adjustments.
Run a complete AMA for best performance. See 5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).

52 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

2. To test motor operation, start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If the motor does not turn, check installation, general
parameter configurations, and motor data.
3. Perform parking operation by setting P 5.6.14 Sync. Motor Parking Current % and P 5.6.13 Sync. Motor Parking Time. The
factory setting values of the parameters can be adjusted and increased for applications with high inertia. Start the motor at
nominal speed. If the application does not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. The following table shows recommendations
in different applications.

Table 13: Recommendations in Different Applications

Application Settings

Low inertia applications ILoad/IMotor<5 • Increase the value for P 4.4.4.10 Voltage filter time const.
by factor 5–10.
• Reduce the value for P 4.4.4.7 Damping Gain.
• Reduce the value (<100%) for P 4.4.4.14 Min. Current at
Low Speed.

Medium inertia applications 50>ILoad/IMotor>5 Keep calculated values.

High inertia applications ILoad/IMotor>50 Increase the values for P 4.4.4.7 Damping Gain, P 4.4.4.9 Low
Speed Filter Time Const., and P 4.4.4.8 High Speed Filter Time
Const.

High load at low speed <30% (rated speed) Increase the value for P 4.4.4.10 Voltage filter time const.
Increase the value for P 4.4.4.14 Min. Current at Low Speed
(>100% for longer time can overheat the motor).

If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase P 4.4.4.7 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps. Starting
torque can be adjusted in P 4.4.4.14 Min. Current at Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.

5.4.4 Speed Control Configuration with I/O Using Default

1. Go to parameter group 5 and specify the following:

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended settings Parameter number

5.4.3 Motor Control Principle Use default: [1] VVC+. In most situations, 101
selecting VVC+ provides optimum
performance without further adjustments.

5.4.2 Operation Mode Use default: [0] Speed Open Loop 100

9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input Use default: [8] Start 510

9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input Use default: [10] Reversing 511

9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input Use default: [1] Reset 512

9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input Use default: [14] Jog 513

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output Use default: [100] Output Frequency 691

9.4.3.1 Function Relay Use default: [9] Fault 540

5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum Use default: 50 303

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 53

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter index Parameter name Recommended settings Parameter number

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum Use default: 0 302

5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time Set value according to real application. 341

5.5.4.3 Ramp 1. Decel. Time Set value according to real application. 342

5.4.5 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

l Via running AMA in VVC+ mode, the drive builds a mathematical model of the motor to optimize compatibility between drive and
motor, and thus enhances the motor control performance.
l Some motors may be unable to run the complete version of the test. In that case, select [2] Enable Reduced AMA in parameter
P 4.2.1.3 AMA Mode.
l The AMA completes within 5 minutes. For best results, run the following procedure on a cold motor.

Procedure
1. Set motor data according to the motor nameplate.
2. If needed, set motor cable length in parameter P 4.2.1.4 Motor Cable Length.
3. Set [1] Enable Complete AMA or [2] Enable Reduced AMA for parameter P 4.2.1.3 AMA Mode, and the main display shows To
start AMA.
4. Press the Start key, the test runs automatically and the main display indicates when it is completed.
5. When AMA is completed, press any key to exit and return to normal operation mode.

e30bv055.10
(1) (2) (3)

Figure 36: AMA Status Indications

1 To start AMA 2 AMA is running

3 AMA is completed

5.5 Application Selection

5.5.1 Application Selection Overview
The application selection function can be used to quickly set up the drive for some of the most common application setups. It is possible
to set the application selection using Quick Access or using P 5.4.1 Application Selection directly.

All pre-configured default parameter values for each application selection apply to a specific control configuration. The application
selection is only applicable when the drive is in remote mode.

NOTICE
When an application is selected, relevant parameters are automatically set. Customer-specific configuration of all parameters
based on specific requirements is possible.

NOTICE
Before setting an application selection, it is recommended to initialize the drive via parameter P 6.6.8 Operation Mode or 2 finger
reset.

54 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The iC2-Micro Frequency Converters have 5 standard modes which have pre-configured parameters and are set automatically. Table 14
contains a summary of the different modes and suitable applications.

Table 14: Standard Modes and Suitable Application

Application selection mode Suitable application

Speed control mode The default mode in iC2-Micro Frequency Converters application selection function. The
mode is used in typical speed control applications for running at stable speed, the fre-
quency converter is controlled by an analog input as reference signal.

Process control mode The mode is suitable for applications which require monitoring and adjusting of, for ex-
ample, temperature, pressure, speed, which must be kept at a desired level using sensor
feedback.

Multi speed control mode The mode is suitable for applications with 4 different speeds by using 2 digital inputs. By
using 1 more digital input, 8 speeds are possible.

3-wire control mode The mode is suitable for typical speed control applications where start or stop is con-
trolled with 2 push buttons.

Torque control mode Suitable for torque control applications which require motor control via torque.

5.5.2 Configuring Speed Control Mode

The section describes the basic configuration for speed control mode.

l Speed control mode is the default application selection for the iC2-Micro drive.
l With default parameter settings and control connections, an I/O-controlled drive can be started with speed open loop quickly.
l This application selection is commonly used for pumps, fans, extruders, conveyors, and so on.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 55

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bj840.10
12 24V

13 DI1 Start (1) / Stop (0)

14 DI2 Reverse (1) / Forward (0)

15 DIO Reset

17 DI3 Jog

18 DI4

20 GND

31 AO1 Output Frequency

1k Ohm
32 10V

33 AI1 Speed Reference 1

34 AI2

35 GND

2 Fault

3
RELAY
Figure 37: Default Connections

1. Set P 5.4.1 Application Selection to [20] Speed Control Mode.

When [20] Speed Control Mode is selected, the following parameters are automatically set to the values shown in the table.

Table 15: Default Settings

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Operation Mode 5.4.2 Operation Mode [0] Speed Open Loop 100

DI 1 - T13 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [8] Start 510

DI 2 - T14 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [10] Reversing 511

DI/O - T15 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

DI 3 - T17 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [14] Jog 513

DI 4 - T18 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input [0] No Operation 515

56 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 15: Default Settings (continued)

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

AI1 - T33 9.5.2.1 T33 mode [1] Voltage Mode 619

9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 10V 611

9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 0.07V 610

9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. 50 615

Value

9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 614

Value

AO1 - T42 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode [0] 0-20mA 690

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output *[100] Output Fre- 691

quency

Relay 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [9] Fault 540

External reference 5.5.3.5 Reference Function [0] Sum 304

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [2] Analog Input 34 316

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [11] Local Bus Refer- 317

ence

Jog 5.9.2 Jog Reference * 5.0 311

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time * 3s 380

Reference limits 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 50. If [1] North Amer- 303
ica is selected for
P 1.2.1 Regional
Settings, the default
value is 60.)

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum 0 302

5.5.3 Configuring Process Control Mode

Process control mode is suitable for applications which requires monitoring and adjusting of a process to give the desired output. With
process control, the frequency converter is widely used to enable quality maintenance, improve performance, increase efficiency, and
decrease cost.

NOTICE
In application and system requirements, make sure to set parameters P 5.5.3.2 Reference/Feedback Unit, P 5.5.3.3 Reference Max,
P 5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum, P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value, P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low, Ref./Feedb. Value, P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./
Feedb. Value, and P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. Value properly. Set these parameters according to the application's requirements.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 57

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bj841.10
12 24V

13 DI1 Start (1) / Stop (0)

14 DI2

15 DIO Reset

17 DI3 Jog (Speed Mode)

18 DI4

20 GND

31 AO1 Output Frequency

1k Ohm
32 10V

33 AI1 Process Reference 1

34 AI2 Process Feedback

35 GND

2 Fault

3
RELAY
Figure 38: Default Connections for Process Control

1. Set P 5.4.1 Application Selection to [21] Process Control Mode.

When [21] Process Control Mode is selected, the following parameters are automatically set to the values shown in the table.

Table 16: Process Control Mode Default Settings

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Operation Mode 5.4.2 Operation Mode [3] Process Close Loop 100

DI 1 - T13 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [8] Start 510

DI 2 - T14 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [0] No operation 511

DI/O - T15 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

DI 3 - T17 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [14] Jog 513

DI 4 - T18 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input [0] No Operation 515

58 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 16: Process Control Mode Default Settings (continued)

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

AI1 - T33 9.5.2.1 T33 mode [1] Voltage Mode 619

9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 10V 611

9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 0.07 V 610

9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. 50 615

Value

9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 614

Value

AI2 - T34 9.5.3.1 T34 mode [0] Current Mode 629

9.5.3.4 T34 High Current 20.00 mA 623

9.5.3.5 T34 Low Current 4.00 mA 622

9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. 50. If [1] North Amer- 625

Value ica is selected for
P 1.2.1 Regional
Settings, the default
value is 60.

9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 624

Value

AO1 - T42 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode [0] 0-20mA 690

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output [100] Output Fre- 691

quency

Relay 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [9] Fault 540

PID 5.12.4.1 Feedback 1 Resource [2] Analog Input 34 720

5.12.5.7 PID Normal / Inverse [0] Normal 730

Control

Jog 5.9.2 Jog Reference 5.0 311

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time 3s 380

External reference 5.5.3.5 Reference Function [0] Sum 304

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [0] Function 316

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [0] Function 317

5.5.4 Configuring Multi-Speed Control Mode

Multi-speed control mode allows to use 2 digital inputs for 4 different speeds. By using 1 more digital input, 8 speeds are possible.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 59

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bj842.10
12 24V

13 DI1 Start (1) / Stop (0)

14 DI2 Reverse (1) / Forward (0)

15 DIO Reset

17 DI3 Preset Ref. bit 0

18 DI4 Preset Ref. bit 1

20 GND

31 AO1 Output Frequency

32 10V

33 AI1

34 AI2

35 GND

2 Fault

3
RELAY

Figure 39: Default Connections

1. Set P 5.4.1 Application Selection to [22] Multi-speed Control Mode.

When [22] Multi-speed Control Mode is selected, the following parameters are automatically set to the values shown in the
table.

Table 17: Default Settings

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Operation mode 5.4.2 Operation Mode [0] Speed Open Loop 100

DI 1 - T13 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [8] Start 510

DI 2 - T14 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [10] Reversing 511

DI/O - T15 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

DI 3 - T17 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [16] Preset Ref. Bit 0 513

DI 4 - T18 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input [17] Preset Ref. Bit 1 515

AO1 - T42 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode [0] 0–20 mA 690

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output [100] Output Fre- 691

quency

Relay 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [9] Fault 540

60 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 17: Default Settings (continued)

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

External reference 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [0] No Function 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [0] No Function 316

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [0] No Function 317

Preset refer. 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference Note: Set as array 310

type Table 18.

Jog 5.9.2 Jog Reference 5.0 311

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time 3s 380

Reference limits 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 50. If [1] North Amer- 303
ica is selected for
P 1.2.1 Regional
Settings, the default
value is 60.

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum 0 302

Table 18: Parameter P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference Setting (Array Type)

Reference DI4 (Terminal 18) DI3 (Terminal 17)

[17] Preset Ref Bit [1] [16] Preset Ref Bit [0]

Preset Reference 0 0 0

Preset Reference 1 0 1

Preset Reference 2 1 0

Preset Reference 3 1 1

5.5.5 Configuring Wire Control Mode

3-Wire Control Mode of the drive enables to imitate the common contactor control circuit to control the motor. This is possible by using
2 momentary push-buttons to control motor start and motor stop. Reversing is controlled by 1 digital input.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 61

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bj843.10
12 24V

13 DI1 Start (pulse )

14 DI2 Reverse (1) / Forward (0)

15 DIO Reset

17 DI3 Jog

18 DI4 Stop (pulse )

20 GND

31 AO1 Output Frequency

1k Ohm
32 10V

33 AI1 Speed Reference 1

34 AI2

35 GND

2 Fault

3
RELAY
Figure 40: Default Connections

1. Set P 5.4.1 Application Selection to [23] 3-Wire Control Mode.

When [23] 3-Wire Control Mode is selected, the following parameters are automatically set to the values shown in the table.

Table 19: Default Settings

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Operation mode 5.4.2 Operation Mode [0] Speed Open Loop 100

DI 1 - T13 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [9] Latched start 510

DI 2 - T14 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [10] Reversing 511

DI/O - T15 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

DI 3 - T17 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [14] Jog 513

DI 4 - T18 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input [6] Stop inverse 515

62 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 19: Default Settings (continued)

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

AI1 - T33 9.5.2.1 T33 Mode [1] Voltage Mode 619

9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 10 V 611

9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 0.07 V 610

9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. 50 615

Value

9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 614

Value

AO1 - T42 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode [0] 0-20mA 690

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output [100] Output Fre- 691

quency

Relay 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [9] Fault 540

External reference 5.5.3.5 Reference Function [0] Sum 304

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [0] No Function 316

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [0] No Function 317

Jog 5.9.2 Jog Reference 5.0 311

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time 3s 380

Reference limits 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 50. If [1] North Amer- 303
ica is selected for
P 1.2.1 Regional
Settings, the default
value is 60.

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum 0 302

Start Start
e30bk103.10

D11 Rising Edge Command Ignored Rising Edge

Start
Stop
D14 Falling Edge
Stop
Reverse Reverse
DI2
Reverse

Fr-out max.
Frequency
Output 0Hz
-Fr-out max.

Figure 41: Example

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 63

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

5.5.6 Configuring Torque Control Mode

In torque control mode, the pre-configured parameter settings require to control the motor via torque. The motor torque follows a
torque reference given by an analog input to the frequency converter. Analog input 1 is used as torque reference; analog input 2 is used
as maximum speed limitation source for torque control.

Note the following:

l Torque control mode is supported in VVC+ control only, and only for [0] Asynchronous Induction Motor, IM selected in P 4.2.1.1
Motor Type control.
l Torque reference value for P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum is calculated automatically based on the motor data entered according to
motor nameplate.
l Make sure P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value is set according to the application requirement. Typically, the value in P 9.5.2.6 T33
High Ref./Feedb. Value is equal to the value in P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum.
l If the operation does not require speed limit under torque control, set P 5.10.3 Speed Limit Mode Torque Ctrl. to [0] No Function.

e30bj844.10
12 24V

13 DI1 Start (1) / Stop (0)

14 DI2

15 DIO Reset

17 DI3 Jog (Speed Mode)

18 DI4

20 GND

31 AO1 Output Frequency

1k Ohm
32 10V

33 AI1 Torque Reference 1

34 AI2 Speed Limitation

35 GND

2 Fault

Figure 42: Default Connections

1. Set P 5.4.1 Application Selection to [24] Torque Control Mode.

When [24] Torque Control Mode is selected, the following parameters are automatically set to the values shown in the table.

64 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 20: Default Settings

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Operation mode 5.4.2 Operation Mode [4] Torque Open Loop 100

DI 1 - T13 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input [8] Start 510

DI 2 - T14 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input [0] No operation 511

DI/O - T15 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input [1] Reset 512

DI 3 - T17 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input [14] Jog 513

DI 4 - T18 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input [0] No Operation 515

AI1 - T33 9.5.2.1 T33 Mode [1] Voltage Mode 619

9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 10V 611

9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 0.07V 610

9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. The value should be 615

Value set manually accord-
ing to application re-
quirement.

9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 614

Value

AI2 - T34 9.5.3.1 T34 Mode [0] Current Mode 629

9.5.3.4 T34 High Current 20.00 mA 623

9.5.3.5 T34 Low Current 4.00 mA 622

9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. 50. If [1] North Amer- 625

Value ica is selected for
P 1.2.1 Regional
Settings, the default
value is 60.

9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 624

Value

AO1 - T42 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode [0] 0-20 mA 690

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output [100] Output Fre- 691

quency

Relay 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [9] Fault 540

External reference 5.5.3.5 Reference Function [0] Sum 304

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [0] No Function 316

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [11] No Function 317

Speed Limit 5.10.3 Speed Limit Mode [0] No Function 421

Torque Ctrl.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 65

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 20: Default Settings (continued)

Category Parameter index Parameter name Default setting Parameter number

Jog 5.9.2 Jog Reference 5.0 Hz 311

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time 3s 380

Reference limits 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum Value is automatically 303

calculated according
to motor data.

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum 0 302

5.6 Reference Handling

5.6.1 Local/Remote Reference
Local reference

The local reference is active when the drive is operated and adjusted by Up and Down buttons of the control panel.

Remote reference

The reference handling system for calculating the remote reference is shown in the Figure 43.

66 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30bk090.10
Relative scaling ref.

No function
P 5.5.3.12

Analog ref.

Pulse ref.

Local bus ref.

Control Panel
Potentiometer

P 5.5.3.11
Preset relative ref.

P 5.5.3.1 P 5.4.2
(0) Ref./feedback range Configuration mode
(1)

(2) P 9.4.2.1x(19)/P 9.4.2.1x(20)

(3)
Preset ref.
P 5.5.3.10

Speed open loop

(4) Freeze ref.
Scale to
(5) -max ref./ Hz
P 9.4.2.1x(28)/P 9.4.2.1x(29) +max ref.
(6) 100%
Input command:
(7) Catch up/ slow down
-100% Torque
P 5.5.3.5 P 5.1.16
Reference Y Remote
Relative Catch up/ ref.
Function Scale to
X+X*Y slow Nm
(0) X
/100 down
max ref.
(1) %
No function P 5.5.3.13 Freeze Up/
D1 Down Step Delta Process
P 9.4.2.1x(15)
Ref.resource 1

Analog ref. Catchup Slowdown %

Preset '1'
Scale to
P 5.5.3.7

External '0' value min ref.

Pulse ref. process
±100% unit
Local bus ref. Freeze ref.
&
Control Panel increase/
Potentiometer decrease
ref.

P 9.4.2.1x(21)/P 9.4.2.1x(22)
Speed up/ speed down
No function
Ref. resource 2

Analog ref. P 5.1.17

200% Ref. in %
P 5.5.3.8

Pulse ref.
-200%
Local bus ref.
Control Panel
Potentiometer

No function
Ref. resource 3

Analog ref.
P 5.5.3.9

Pulse ref.

Local bus ref.

Control Panel
Potentiometer

Figure 43: Remote Reference

The remote reference is calculated once in every scan interval and initially consists of 2 types of reference inputs:

l X (the external reference): A sum (see P 5.5.3.5 T34 Low Current) of up to 4 externally selected references, comprising any
combination (determined by the setting of P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source, P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source, and P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source)
of a fixed preset reference (P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference), variable analog references, variable digital pulse references, and various
fieldbus references in any unit the drive is monitoring ([Hz], [RPM], [Nm], and so on).
l Y (the relative reference): A sum of 1 fixed preset reference (P 5.5.3.11 Preset Relative Reference) and 1 variable analog reference (P
5.5.3.12 Relative Scaling Reference Resource) in [%].

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 67

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The 2 types of reference inputs are combined in the following formula:

Remote reference=X+X*Y/100%

If relative reference is not used, set P 5.5.3.12 Relative Scaling Reference Resource to [0] No function and P 5.5.3.11 Preset Relative
Reference to 0%. The digital inputs on the drive can activate both the catch up/slow down function and the freeze reference function.

5.6.2 Reference Limits

The reference range, minimum reference, and maximum reference define the allowed range of the sum of all references. The sum of all
references is clamped when necessary. The relation between the resulting reference (after clamping) and the sum of all references are
shown in Figure 44 and Figure 45.

Reference range = Minimum to maximum

Resulting reference e30bk091.10

Maximum reference
Forward

Minimum reference

Sum of all
references
-Minimum reference

Reverse

-Maximum reference

Figure 44: Reference Range is Set to 0

Reference range = -Maximum to +maximum

e30bh325.10

Resulting reference

Maximum reference

Sum of all
references

-Maximum reference

Figure 45: Reference Range is Set to 1

The minimum reference cannot be set to less than 0, unless the configuration mode is set to Process. In that case, the following relations
between the resulting reference (after clamping) and the sum of all references are as shown in Figure 46.

68 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Reference range = Minimum to maximum

e30bh326.10
Resulting reference

Maximum reference

Sum of all
Minimum reference references

Figure 46: Sum of all References when Configuration Mode is set to Process

5.6.3 Scaling of Preset References and Bus References

Preset references are scaled according to the following rules:

l When P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range is set to [0] Min–Max, 0% reference equals 0 [unit] where unit can be any unit, for example RPM,
m/s, and bar. 100% reference equals the maximum (absolute value of P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum, absolute value of P 5.5.3.4
Reference Minimum).
l When P 5.5.3.3 Reference Range is set to [1] -Max–+Max, 0% reference equals 0 [unit], and 100% reference equals maximum
reference.

Bus references are scaled according to the following rules:

l When P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range is set to [0] Min–Max, 0% reference equals minimum reference and 100% reference equals
maximum reference.
l When P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range is set to [1] -Max–+Max, -100% reference equals -maximum reference, and 100% reference equals
maximum reference.

5.6.4 Scaling of Analog and Pulse References and Feedback

References and feedback are scaled from analog and pulse inputs in the same way. The only difference is that a reference above or below
the specified minimum and maximum endpoints (P1 and P2 in the Figure 47) are clamped while feedbacks above or below are not.

Resource output
e30bd431.10

[Hz]

High reference/
feedback value 50 P2

Low reference/ P1
feedback value
Resource input

[V]
0 1 8 10
Terminal X
high

Figure 47: Minimum and Maximum Endpoints

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 69

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The endpoints P1 and P2 are defined in the Table 21 depending on the choice of input.

Table 21: P1 and P2 Endpoints

Input AI 33 voltage mode AI 34 voltage mode AI 34 current mode Pulse input 18

P1=(Minimum input value, minimum reference value)

Minimum reference P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./ P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./ P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./ P 9.4.4.4 T18 Low Ref./
value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value

Minimum input value P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low P 9.5.3.3 T34 Low P 9.5.3.5 T34 Low P 9.4.4.2 T18 Low
Voltage Voltage Current Frequency

P2=(Maximum input value, maximum reference value)

Maximum reference P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./ P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./ P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./ P 9.4.4.3 T18 High Ref./
value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value Feedb. Value

Maximum input value P 9.5.2.2 T33 High P 9.5.3.2 T34 High P 9.5.3.4 T34 High P 9.4.4.1 T18 High
Voltage Voltage Current Frequency

5.6.5 Dead Band Around Zero

Sometimes, the reference (in rare cases also the feedback) should have a dead band around 0 to ensure that the machine is stopped
when the reference is near 0.

To make the dead band active and to set the amount of dead band, do the following:

l Set either the minimum reference value (see the table in Table 21 for relevant parameter) or maximum reference value at 0. In other
words, either P1 or P2 must be on the X-axis in the Figure 48.
l Ensure that both points defining the scaling graph are in the same quadrant.

P1 or P2 defines the size of the dead band as shown in the Figure 48.

Resource output
e30bd446.10

Quadrant 2 Quadrant 1
[Hz] or “No unit”

High reference/feedback 50 P2
value forward

P1
Resource input
Low reference/feedback 0
[mA]
value 1 16 20
Terminal X high
Terminal low

-50 reverse

Quadrant 3 Quadrant 4

Figure 48: Size of Dead Band

Case 1: Positive reference with dead band, digital input to trigger reverse, part I

Figure 49 shows how reference input with limits inside minimum to maximum limits clamps.

70 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

General Reference General Motor

e30bk092.10
parameters: parameters:
Limited to: -200%- +200%
Reference Range: Min - Max Motor speed direction:Both directions
Minimum Reference: 0 Hz (0,0%) (-40 Hz- +40 Hz)
Motor speed Low limit: 0 Hz
Maximum Reference: 20 Hz (100,0%) Motor speed high limit: 8 Hz

AI 33
Low reference 0 Hz Ext. reference Reference Limited to:
+
High reference 20 Hz Range: algorithm
0%- +100%
Low voltage 1 V 0.0% (0 Hz)
Ext. Reference (0 Hz- +20 Hz)
High voltage 10 V 100.0% (20 Hz)
Absolute
0 Hz 1 V
Ext. source 1
20 Hz 10V Reference
Range:
Range:
0.0% (0 Hz) Reference is scaled
according to min 0.0% (0 Hz)
100.0% (20 Hz)
max reference giving a 100.0% (20 Hz)
speed.!!!
Dead band
Hz
20
Scale to Hz
speed 20

V
1 10
V
1 10
Speed
setpoint
Range: -20
DI 14 -20 Hz
Digital input Low No reversing +20 Hz
High Reversing

Limits Speed Setpoint

according to min max speed.!!!

Motor PID

Motor Range:
control -8 Hz Motor
+8 Hz

Figure 49: Clamping of Reference Input with Limits inside Minimum to Maximum

Case 2: Positive reference with dead band, digital input to trigger reverse, part II

Figure 50 shows how reference input with limits outside -maximum to +maximum limits clamps to the input low and high limits before
adding to external reference, and how the external reference is clamped to -maximum to +maximum by the reference algorithm.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 71

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

General Reference General Motor

e30bk093.10
parameters: parameters:
Limited to: -200%- +200%
Reference Range: -Max - Max Motor speed direction: Both directions
Minimum Reference: Don't care (-40 Hz- +40 Hz)
Motor speed Low limit: 0 Hz
Maximum Reference: 20 Hz (100.0%) Motor speed high limit: 10 Hz

AI 33
Low reference 0 Hz + Ext. reference Reference Limited to:
High reference 20 Hz Range: algorithm -100%- +100%
Ext. Reference Low voltage 1 V 0.0% (0 Hz) (-20 Hz- +20 Hz)
High voltage 10 V 150.0% (30 Hz)
Absolute
0 Hz 1 V Ext. source 1
30 Hz 10 V Reference
Range:
Range:
0.0% (0 Hz) Reference is scaled
150.0% (30 Hz) according to 0.0% (0 Hz)
max reference giving a 100.0% (20 Hz)
speed.!!!
Dead band
30 Hz
Scale to
speed 20 Hz

V
1 10
V
1 10
Speed
setpoint
Range: -20 Hz
DI 14 -20 Hz
Digital input Low No reversing +20 Hz
High Reversing

Limits Speed Setpoint

according to min max speed.!!!

Motor PID

Motor Range:
control –10 Hz Motor
+10 Hz

Figure 50: Clamping of Reference Input with Limits outside -Maximum to +Maximum

72 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6 RS485 Configurations
6.1 RS485 Installation and Set up
6.1.1 Introduction
RS485 is a 2-wire bus interface compatible with multi-drop network topology. The nodes can be connected as a bus, or via drop cables
from a common trunk line. A total of 32 nodes can be connected to 1 network segment. Repeaters divide network segments, see the
Figure 51.

R+

e75za145.12
R+

Master 1 2 3 31 Repeater

R+ R+

Repeater 1 2 3 30

R+ R+

1 2 3 30

Repeater

R+ R+

1 2 3 30 31

Figure 51: RS485 Bus Interface

NOTICE
Each repeater functions as a node within the segment in which it is installed. Each node connected within a given network must
have a unique node address across all segments.

Terminate each segment at both ends, using either the termination switch (S801) of the drives or a biased termination resistor network.
Always use shielded twisted pair (STP) cable for bus cabling and follow good common installation practice.

Low-impedance ground connection of the shield at every node is important, including at high frequencies. Thus, connect a large surface
of the shield to ground, for example with a cable clamp or a conductive cable gland. Sometimes, it is necessary to apply potential-
equalizing cables to maintain the same ground potential throughout the network, particularly in installations with long cables.

To prevent impedance mismatch, use the same type of cable throughout the entire network. When connecting a motor to the drive,
always use shielded motor cable.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 73

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 22: Cable Specifications

Cable Shielded twisted pair (STP)

Impedance [Ω] 120

Cable length [m (ft)] Maximum 1200 (3937) (including drop lines).

Maximum 500 (1640) station-to-station.

6.1.2 Connecting the Drive to the RS485 Network

1. Connect signal wires to terminal 68 (P+) and terminal 69 (N-) on the main control board of the drive.
e30bb795.10

61 68 69
COMM. GND
P
N

Figure 52: Network Connection

2. Connect the cable shield to the cable clamps.

NOTICE
To reduce noise between conductors, use shielded, twisted-pair cables.

6.1.3 Hardware Setup

To terminate the RS485 bus, use the terminator switch on the main control board of the drive. The factory setting for the switch is OFF.
e30bv112.10

1
1

O N
2

Figure 53: Terminator Switch Factory Setting

1 RS485 termination switch (ON=RS485 terminated, 2 RS485 terminals

OFF=Open)

6.1.4 Parameter Settings for RS485 Communication

Two communication protocols are internal to the frequency converter.

l Danfoss FC

74 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

l Modbus RTU

Functions can be programmed remotely using the protocol software and RS485 connection, or in parameter group 10.

Table 23: RS485 Communication Parameter Settings

Parameter Function

P 10.1.1 Protocol Select the application protocol to run for the RS485 interface.

P 10.1.2 Address Set the node address.

NOTICE
The address range depends on the protocol selected in P 10.1.1 Protocol.

P 10.1.3 Baud Rate Set the baud rate.

NOTICE
The default baud rate depends on the protocol selected in P 10.1.1 Protocol.

P 10.1.4 Parity/Stop Bits Set the parity and number of stop bits.

NOTICE
The default selection depends on the protocol selected in P 10.1.1 Protocol.

P 10.1.6 Minimum Response Delay Specify a minimum delay time between receiving a request and sending a response.
This function is for overcoming modem turnaround delays.

P 10.1.5 Maximum Response Delay Specify a maximum delay time between sending a request and receiving a response.

6.1.5 EMC Precautions

To achieve interference-free operation of the RS485 network, Danfoss recommends the following EMC precautions.

NOTICE
Observe relevant national and local regulations, for example regarding protective earth connection. Failure to ground the cables
properly can result in communication degradation and equipment damage. To avoid coupling of high-frequency noise between
the cables, keep the RS485 communication cable away from motor and brake resistor cables. Normally, a distance of 200 mm
(8 in) is sufficient. Maintain the greatest possible distance between the cables, especially where cables run in parallel over long
distances. When crossing is unavoidable, the RS485 cable must cross motor and brake resistor cables at an angle of 90°.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 75

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e95na493.11
1

90°

Figure 54: Minimum Distance between Communication and Power Cables

1 Fieldbus cable 2 Minimum 200 mm (8 in) distance

6.1.6 FC Protocol
6.1.6.1 FC Protocol Overview
The FC protocol, also referred to as FC bus or standard bus, is the Danfoss standard fieldbus. It defines an access technique according to
the master/follower principle for communications via a fieldbus.

One master and a maximum of 126 followers can be connected to the bus. The master selects the individual followers via an address
character in the telegram. A follower itself can never transmit without first being requested to do so, and direct telegram transfer
between the individual followers is not possible. Communications occur in the halfduplex mode.

The master function cannot be transferred to another node (single-master system).

The physical layer is RS485, thus utilizing the RS485 port built into the drive. The FC protocol supports different telegram formats:

l A short format of 8 bytes for process data.

l A long format of 16 bytes that also includes a parameter channel.
l A format used for texts.

The FC protocol provides access to the control word and bus reference of the drive.

The control word allows the master to control several important functions of the drive:

l Start.
l Stop of the drive in various ways:
¢ Coast stop.
¢ Quick stop.
¢ DC brake stop.
¢ Normal (ramp) stop.

76 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

l Reset after a fault trip.

l Run at various preset speeds.
l Run in reverse.
l Change of the active set-up.
l Control of the 2 relays built into the drive.

The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is also possible to access the parameters, read their values, and where possible,
write values to them. Accessing the parameters offers a range of control options, including controlling the setpoint of the drive when its
internal PI controller is used.

6.1.6.2 FC Protocol Message Framing Structure

6.1.6.2.1 Content of a Character (byte)

Each character transferred begins with a start bit. Then 8 data bits are transferred, corresponding to a byte. Each character is secured via
a parity bit. This bit is set at 1 when it reaches parity. Parity is when there is an equal number of 1s in the 8 data bits and the parity bit in
total. A stop bit completes a character, consisting of 11 bits in all.
e95na036.10

Start 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Even Stop

bit parity bit

Figure 55: Content of a Character

6.1.6.2.2 Telegram Structure

Each telegram has the following structure:

l Start character (STX) = 02 hex.

l A byte denoting the telegram length (LGE).
l A byte denoting the drive address (ADR).

Several data bytes (variable, depending on the type of telegram) follow.

A data control byte (BCC) completes the telegram.

e95na099.10

STX LGE ADR DATA BCC

Figure 56: Telegram Structure

6.1.6.2.3 Telegram Length (LGE)

The telegram length is the number of data bytes plus the address byte ADR and the data control byte BCC.

Table 24: Length of Telegrams

4 data bytes LGE=4+1+1=6 bytes

12 data bytes LGE=12+1+1=14 bytes

Telegrams containing texts 10(1)+n bytes

1) The 10 represents the fixed characters, while the n is variable (depending on the length of the text).

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 77

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.1.6.2.4 Drive Address (ADR)

Address format 1–126:

l Bit 7 = 1 (address format 1–126 active).

l Bit 0–6 = drive address 1–126.
l Bit 0–6 = 0 broadcast.

The follower returns the address byte unchanged to the master in the response telegram.

6.1.6.2.5 Data Control Byte (BCC)

The checksum is calculated as an XOR-function. Before the first byte in the telegram is received, the calculated checksum is 0.

6.1.6.2.6 The Data Field

The structure of data blocks depends on the type of telegram. There are 3 telegram types, and the type applies for both control
telegrams (master->follower) and response telegrams (follower->master).

The 3 types of telegram are:

l Process block (PCD).

l Parameter block.
l Text block.

Process block (PCD)

The PCD is made up of a data block of 4 bytes (2 words) and contains:

l Control word and reference value (from master to follower).

l Status word and present output frequency (from follower to master).

e30ba269.10
STX LGE ADR PCD1 PCD2 BCC

Figure 57: Process Block

Parameter block

The parameter block is used to transfer parameters between master and follower. The data block is made up of 12 bytes (6 words) and
also contains the process block.
e30ba271.10

STX LGE ADR PKE IND PWEhigh PWE low PCD1 PCD2 BCC

Figure 58: Parameter Block

Text block

The text block is used to read or write texts via the data block.
e30ba270.10

STX LGE ADR PKE IND Ch1 Ch2 Chn PCD1 PCD2 BCC

Figure 59: Text Block

78 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.1.6.2.7 The PKE Field

The PKE field contains 2 subfields:

l Parameter command and response (AK)

l Parameter number (PNU)

e30bb918.10
PKE IND PWEhigh PWElow

AK PNU

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Parameter
commands
and replies
Parameter

number

Figure 60: PKE Field

Bits 12–15 transfer parameter commands from master to follower and return processed follower responses to the master.

Table 25: Parameter Commands

Parameter commands master->follower

Bit number Parameter command

15 14 13 12

0 0 0 0 No command.

0 0 0 1 Read parameter value.

0 0 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM (word).

0 0 1 1 Write parameter value in RAM (double word).

1 1 0 1 Write parameter value in RAM and EEPROM (double word).

1 1 1 0 Write parameter value in RAM and EEPROM (word).

1 1 1 1 Read text.

Table 26: Response

Response follower->master

Bit number Response

15 14 13 12

0 0 0 0 No response.

0 0 0 1 Parameter value transferred (word).

0 0 1 0 Parameter value transferred (double word).

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 79

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 26: Response (continued)

0 1 1 1 Command cannot be performed.

1 1 1 1 Text transferred.

If the command cannot be performed, the follower sends 0111 Command cannot be performed response and issues the following fault
reports in the Table 27.

Table 27: Follower Report

Fault code FC specification

0 Illegal parameter number.

1 Parameter cannot be changed

2 Upper or lower limit is exceeded.

3 Subindex is corrupted.

4 No array.

5 Wrong data type.

6 Not used.

7 Not used.

9 Description element is not available.

11 No parameter write access.

15 No text available.

17 Not applicable while running.

18 Other errors.

100 –

>100 –

130 No bus access for this parameter.

131 Write to factory set-up is not possible.

132 No control panel access.

252 Unknown viewer.

253 Request is not supported.

254 Unknown attribute.

255 No error.

6.1.6.2.8 Parameter Number (PNU)

Bits 0–11 transfer parameter numbers. The parameter number is the unique identifier of a parameter for modbus registers. As an
example, consider write to P 5.4.2 Operation Mode, the register is 999. The register is the Parameter Number * 10-1. In P 5.4.2 Operation
Mode, the parameter number is 100. For more information on parameter number, see 7.1 Reading the Parameter Table.

80 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.1.6.2.9 Index (IND)

The index is used with the parameter number to read/write access parameters with an index, for example, P 6.1.1 Latest Fault Number.
The index consists of 2 bytes: a low byte and a high byte. Only the low byte is used as an index.

6.1.6.2.10 Parameter Value (PWE)

The parameter value block consists of 2 words (4 bytes), and the value depends on the defined command (AK). The master prompts for a
parameter value when the PWE block contains no value. To change a parameter value (write), write the new value in the PWE block and
send from the master to the follower.

When a follower responds to a parameter request (read command), the present parameter value in the PWE block is transferred and
returned to the master. If a parameter contains several data options, select the data value by entering the value in the PWE block. Serial
communication is only capable of reading parameters containing data type 9 (text string).

P 6.7.1 FC Type to P 6.7.9 Power Card Serial Number contain data type 9. For example, read the unit size and mains voltage range in P
6.7.1 FC Type. When a text string is transferred (read), the length of the telegram is variable, and the texts are of different lengths. The
telegram length is defined in the 2nd byte of the telegram (LGE). When using text transfer, the index character indicates whether it is a
read or a write command.

To read a text via the PWE block, set the parameter command (AK) to F hex. The index character high-byte must be 4.

6.1.6.2.11 Data Types Supported by the Drive

Table 28: Data Types

Data types Description

3 Integer 16

4 Integer 32

5 Unsigned 8(1)
(1)
6 Unsigned 16(1)

7 Unsigned 32(1)

9 Text string

10 Byte string

13 Time difference

33 Reserved

35 Bit sequence

1) Unsigned means that there is no operational sign in the telegram.

6.1.6.2.12 Conversion
The application guide contains the descriptions of attributes of each parameter. Parameter values are transferred as whole numbers only.
Conversion factors are used to transfer decimals.

P 5.8.3 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of 0.1. To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer the value 100. A
conversion factor of 0.1 means that the value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is thus perceived as 10.0.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 81

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 29: Conversion

Conversion index Conversion factor

74 3600

2 100

1 10

0 1

-1 0.1

-2 0.01

-3 0.001

-4 0.0001

-5 0.00001

6.1.6.2.13 Process Words (PCD)

The block of process words is divided into 2 blocks of 16 bits, which always occur in the defined sequence.

Table 30: Process Words (PCD)

PCD 1 PCD 2

Control telegram (master->follower control word) Reference value

Control telegram (follower->master) status word Present output frequency

6.1.6.3 Examples

6.1.6.3.1 Overview of Examples

Bits 0–11 transfer parameter numbers. For more information on parameter number, see 7.1 Reading the Parameter Table. As an example,
for P 5.4.2 Operation Mode, the parameter number is 100.

6.1.6.3.2 Writing a Parameter Value

Change P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] to 100 Hz.

Write the data in EEPROM.

PKE = E19E hex - Write single word in P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]. The parameter number is 414.

l IND = 0000 hex.

l PWEHIGH = 0000 hex.
l PWELOW = 03E8 hex.

Data value 1000, corresponding to 100 Hz, see 6.1.6.2.12 Conversion.

The telegram looks like the following illustration.

82 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

e30ba092.10
E19E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H

PKE IND PWEhigh PWE low

Figure 61: Telegram

NOTICE
P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is a single word, and the parameter command for write in EEPROM is E. P 5.8.2 Motor Speed
High Limit [Hz] is 19E in hexadecimal. The parameter number is 414.

The response from the follower to the master is shown in the Figure 62.

e30ba093.10
119E H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H

PKE IND PWEhigh PWE low

Figure 62: Response from Master

6.1.6.3.3 Reading a Parameter Value

Read the value in P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time.

PKE = 1155 hex - Read parameter value in P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time. The parameter number is 341.

l IND = 0000 hex.

l PWEHIGH = 0000 hex.
l PWELOW = 0000 hex.
e30ba094.10

1155 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H

PKE IND PWEhigh PWE low

Figure 63: Telegram

If the value in P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is 10 s, the response from the follower to the master is shown in the Figure 64.
e30ba267.10

1155 H 0000 H 0000 H 03E8 H

PKE IND PWEhigh PWE low

Figure 64: Response

3E8 hex corresponds to 1000 decimal. The conversion index for P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is -2, that is, 0.01.

P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time is of the type Unsigned 32. The parameter number is 341.

6.1.7 Modbus RTU

6.1.7.1 Modbus RTU Introduction
Prerequisite knowledge

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 83

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Danfoss assumes that the installed controller supports the interfaces in this manual, and strictly observes all requirements and
limitations stipulated in the controller and drive. The built-in Modbus RTU (remote terminal unit) is designed to communicate with
any controller that supports the interfaces defined in this guide. It is assumed that the user has full knowledge of the capabilities and
limitations of the controller.

Modbus RTU overview

Regardless of the type of physical communication networks, this section describes the process that a controller uses to request access to
another device. This process includes how the Modbus RTU responds to requests from another device, and how errors are detected and
reported. It also establishes a common format for the layout and contents of telegram fields.

During communications over a Modbus RTU network, the protocol:

l determines how each controller learns its device address.

l recognizes a telegram addressed to it.
l determines which actions to take.
l extracts any data or other information contained in the telegram.

If a reply is required, the controller constructs the reply telegram and sends it. Controllers communicate using a master/follower
technique in which only the master can initiate transactions (called queries). Followers respond by supplying the requested data to
the master, or by acting as requested in the query. The master can address individual followers, or initiate a broadcast telegram to all
followers. Followers return a response to queries that are addressed to them individually. No responses are returned to broadcast queries
from the master.

The Modbus RTU protocol establishes the format for the master query by providing the following information:

l The device (or broadcast) address.

l A function code defining the requested action.
l Any data to be sent.
l An error-checking field.

The response telegram of the follower device is also constructed using Modbus protocol. It contains fields confirming the action taken,
any data to be returned, and an error-checking field. If an error occurs in receipt of the telegram, or if the follower is unable to perform
the requested action, the follower constructs and sends an error message. Alternatively, a timeout occurs.

6.1.7.2 Drive with Modbus RTU

The drive communicates in Modbus RTU format over the built-in RS485 interface. Modbus RTU provides access to the control word and
bus reference of the drive.

The control word allows the Modbus master to control several important functions of the drive:

l Start.
l Various stops:
¢ Coast stop.
¢ Quick stop.
¢ DC brake stop.
¢ Normal (ramp) stop.
l Reset after a fault trip.
l Run at various preset speeds.
l Run in reverse.
l Change the active set-up.
l Control built-in relay of the drive.

84 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The bus reference is commonly used for speed control. It is also possible to access the parameters, read their values, and, where possible,
write values to them. Accessing the parameters offers a range of control options, including controlling the setpoint of the drive when its
internal PI controller is used.

6.1.7.3 Network Configuration

To enable the FC protocol for the drive, set the following parameters.

Table 31: Parameters to Enable the Protocol

Parameter Setting

P 10.1.1 Protocol Modbus

P 10.1.2 Address 1–247

P 10.1.3 Baud Rate 2400–115200

P 10.1.4 Parity/Stop Bits Even parity, 1 stop bit (default)

6.1.7.4 Modbus RTU Message Framing Structure

6.1.7.4.1 Modbus RTU Message Byte Format

The controllers are set up to communicate on the Modbus network using RTU (remote terminal unit) mode, with each byte in a telegram
containing 2 4-bit hexadecimal characters. The format for each byte is shown in the following tables.

Table 32: Format for Each Byte

Start bit Data byte Stop/ Stop

parity

Table 33: Byte Details

Coding system 8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0–9, A–F.

2 hexadecimal characters contained in each 8-bit field of the telegram.

Bits per byte • 1 start bit.

• 8 data bits, least significant bit sent first.
• 1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity.
• 1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity.

Error check field Cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

6.1.7.4.2 Modbus RTU Telegram Structure

The transmitting device places a Modbus RTU telegram into a frame with a known beginning and ending point. This allows receiving
devices to begin at the start of the telegram, read the address portion, determine which device is addressed (or all devices, if the
telegram is broadcast), and to recognize when the telegram is completed. Partial telegrams are detected and errors set as a result.
Characters for transmission must be in hexadecimal 00–FF format in each field. The drive continuously monitors the network bus, also
during silent intervals. When the 1st field (the address field) is received, each drive or device decodes it to determine which device is
being addressed. Modbus RTU telegrams addressed to 0 are broadcast telegrams. No response is allowed for broadcast telegrams. A
typical telegram frame is shown in the following table.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 85

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 34: Typical Modbus RTU Telegram Structure

Start Address Function Data CRC check End

T1-T2-T3- T4 8 bits 8 bits N x 8 bits 16 bits T1-T2-T3- T4

6.1.7.4.3 Start/Stop Field

Telegrams start with a silent period of at least 3.5 character intervals. The silent period is implemented as a multiple of character intervals
at the selected network baud rate (shown as Start T1-T2-T3-T4). The 1st field to be transmitted is the device address. Following the last
transmitted character, a similar period of at least 3.5 character intervals marks the end of the telegram. A new telegram can begin after
this period.

Transmit the entire telegram frame as a continuous stream. If a silent period of more than 1.5 character intervals occurs before
completion of the frame, the receiving device flushes the incomplete telegram and assumes that the next byte is the address field of a
new telegram. Similarly, if a new telegram begins before 3.5 character intervals after a previous telegram, the receiving device considers
it a continuation of the previous telegram. This behavior causes a timeout (no response from the follower), since the value in the final
CRC field is not valid for the combined telegrams.

6.1.7.4.4 Address Field

The address field of a telegram frame contains 8 bits. Valid follower device addresses are in the range of 0–247 decimal. The individual
follower devices are assigned addresses in the range of 1–247. 0 is reserved for broadcast mode, which all followers recognize. A master
addresses a follower by placing the follower address in the address field of the telegram. When the follower sends its response, it places
its own address in this address field to let the master know which follower is responding.

6.1.7.4.5 Function Field

The function field of a telegram frame contains 8 bits. Valid codes are in the range of 1–FF. Function fields are used to send telegrams
between master and follower. When a telegram is sent from a master to a follower device, the function code field tells the follower what
kind of action to perform. When the follower responds to the master, it uses the function code field to indicate either a normal (error free)
response, or that some kind of error occurred (called an exception response).

For a normal response, the follower simply echoes the original function code. For an exception response, the follower returns a code that
is equivalent to the original function code with its most significant bit set to logic 1. In addition, the follower places a unique code into
the data field of the response telegram. This code tells the master what kind of error occurred, or the reason for the exception. Also refer
to 6.2.2 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU and 6.2.3 Modbus Exception Codes.

6.1.7.4.6 Data Field

The data field is constructed using sets of 2 hexadecimal digits, in the range of 00–FF hexadecimal. These digits are made up of 1 RTU
character. The data field of telegrams sent from a master to a follower device contains additional information which the follower must
use to perform accordingly.

The information can include items such as:

l Coil or register addresses.

l The quantity of items to be handled.
l The count of actual data bytes in the field.

86 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.1.7.4.7 CRC Check Field

Telegrams include an error-checking field, operating based on a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) method. The CRC field checks the
contents of the entire telegram. It is applied regardless of any parity check method used for the individual characters of the telegram.
The transmitting device calculates the CRC value and appends the CRC as the last field in the telegram. The receiving device recalculates
a CRC during receipt of the telegram and compares the calculated value to the actual value received in the CRC field. 2 unequal values
result in bus timeout. The error-checking field contains a 16-bit binary value implemented as 2 8-bit bytes. After the implementation,
the low-order byte of the field is appended first, followed by the high-order byte. The CRC high-order byte is the last byte sent in the
telegram.

6.1.7.4.8 Coil Register Addressing

Introduction

In Modbus, all data is organized in coils and holding registers. Coils hold a single bit, whereas holding registers hold a 2 byte word (that is
16 bits). All data addresses in Modbus telegrams are referenced to 0. The 1st occurrence of a data item is addressed as item number 0. For
example: The coil known as coil 1 in a programmable controller is addressed as coil 0000 in the data address field of a Modbus telegram.
Coil 127 decimal is addressed as coil 007Ehex (126 decimal).

Holding register 40001 is addressed as register 0000 in the data address field of the telegram. The function code field already specifies
a holding register operation. Therefore, the 4XXXX reference is implicit. Holding register 40108 is addressed as register 006Bhex (107
decimal).

Coil Register

Table 35: Coil Register

Coil number Description Signal direction

1–16 Drive control word. Master to follower

17–32 Drive speed or setpoint reference range 0x0– 0xFFFF (-200% ... ~200%). Master to follower

33–48 Drive status word. Follower to master

49–64 Open-loop mode: Drive output frequency. Follower to master

Closed-loop mode: Drive feedback signal.

65 Parameter write control (master to follower). Master to follower

0 = Parameter changes are written to the RAM of the drive.

1 = Parameter changes are written to the RAM and EEPROM of the drive.

66–65536 Reserved. –

Drive Control Word (FC Profile)

Table 36: Drive Control Word (FC Profile)

Coil 0 1

01 Preset reference lsb

02 Preset reference msb

03 DC brake No DC brake

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 87

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 36: Drive Control Word (FC Profile) (continued)

Coil 0 1

04 Coast stop No coast stop

05 Quick stop No quick stop

06 Freeze frequency No freeze frequency

07 Ramp stop Start

08 No reset Reset

09 No jog Jog

10 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

11 Data not valid Data valid

12 Relay 1 off Relay 1 on

13 Reserved

14 Set up LSB

15 Reserved

16 No reversing Reversing

Drive Status Word (FC Profile)

Table 37: Drive Status Word (FC Profile)

Coil 0 1

33 Control not ready Control ready

34 Drive not ready Drive ready

35 Coast stop Safety closed

36 No alarm Alarm

37 Not used Not used

38 Not used Not used

39 Not used Not used

40 No warning Warning

41 Not at reference At reference

42 Local mode Remote mode

43 Out of frequency range In frequency range

44 Stopped Running

45 Not used Not used

46 No voltage warning Voltage warning

88 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 37: Drive Status Word (FC Profile) (continued)

Coil 0 1

47 Not in current limit Current limit

48 No thermal warning Thermal warning

Address/Registers

Table 38: Address/Registers

Bus address Bus register(1) PLC register Content Access Description

0 1 40001 Reserved – Reserved for legacy

drives

1 2 40002 Reserved – Reserved for legacy

drives

2 3 40003 Reserved – Reserved for legacy

drives

3 4 40004 Free – –

4 5 40005 Free – –

5 6 40006 Modbus configura- Read/Write TCP only. Reserved

tion for Modbus TCP

6 7 40007 Last fault code Read only Fault code received

from parameter
database

7 8 40008 Last error register Read only Address of register

with which last er-
ror occurred.

8 9 40009 Index pointer Read/Write Subindex of pa-

rameter to be ac-
cessed.

9 10 40010 Dependent on pa- 20 bytes space re-

rameter access served for parame-
ter in Modbus map.

29 30 40030 Dependent on pa- 20 bytes space re-

rameter access served for parame-
ter in Modbus map.

1) Value written in the Modbus RTU telegram must be 1 or less than the register number. For example, Read Modbus Register 1 by writing value 0 in the telegram.

6.1.7.5 How to Access Parameters

6.1.7.5.1 Parameter Handling

The PNU (parameter number) is translated from the register address contained in the Modbus read or write telegram. The parameter
number is translated to Modbus as (10 * parameter number-1) decimal.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 89

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Examples

Reading P 5.5.3.13 Freeze Up/Down Step Delta (16 bit): The parameter numbers is 312, and the register address is 3119 holding the
parameters value. A value of 1252 (decimal), means that the parameter is set to 12.52%.

Reading P 5.5.3.11 Preset Relative Reference (32 bit): Parameter numbers is 341, and the holding registers are 3409 and 3410 holding the
parameter values. A value of 11300 (decimal), means that the parameter is set to 113.00.

6.1.7.5.2 Storage of Data

The coil 65 decimal determines whether data written to the drive is stored in EEPROM and RAM (coil 65 = 1), or only in RAM (coil 65 = 0).

6.1.7.5.3 IND (Index)

Some parameters in the drive are array parameters, for example P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference. Since the Modbus does not support arrays in
the holding registers, the drive has reserved the holding register 9 as pointer to the array. Before reading or writing an array parameter,
set the holding register 9. Setting holding register to the value of 2 causes all following read/write to array parameters to be to the index
2.

6.1.7.5.4 Text Blocks

Parameters stored as text strings are accessed in the same way as the other parameters. The maximum text block size is 20 characters.
If a read request for a parameter is for more characters than the parameter stores, the response is truncated. If the read request for a
parameter is for fewer characters than the parameter stores, the response is space filled.

6.1.7.5.5 Conversion Factor

A parameter value can only be transferred as a whole number. To transfer decimals, use a conversion factor.

6.1.7.5.6 Parameter Values

Standard data types

Standard data types are int 16, int 32, uint 8, uint 16, and uint 32. They are stored as 4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The parameters are read
using function 03 hex read holding registers. Parameters are written using the function 6 hex preset single register for 1 register (16 bits),
and the function 10 hex preset multiple registers for 2 registers (32 bits). Readable sizes range from 1 register (16 bits) up to 10 registers
(20 characters).

Non-standard data types

Non-standard data types are text strings and are stored as 4x registers (40001–4FFFF). The parameters are read using function 03 hex
read holding registers and written using function 10 hex preset multiple registers. Readable sizes range from 1 register (2 characters) up
to 10 registers (20 characters).

6.1.7.6 Examples

6.1.7.6.1 Read Coil Status (01 hex)

Description

This function reads the ON/OFF status of discrete outputs (coils) in the drive. Broadcast is never supported for reads.

Query

The query telegram specifies the starting coil and quantity of coils to be read. Coil addresses start at 0, that is, coil 33 is addressed as 32.
Example of a request to read coils 33–48 (status word) from follower device 01.

90 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 39: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01 (drive address)

Function 01 (read coils)

Starting address HI 00

Starting address LO 20 (32 decimals) coil 33

Number of points HI 00

Number of points LO 10 (16 decimals)

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The coil status in the response telegram is packed as 1 coil per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as: 1 = ON; 0 = OFF. The lsb of the
1st data byte contains the coil addressed in the query. The other coils follow toward the high-order end of this byte, and from low order
to high order in subsequent bytes.

If the returned coil quantity is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits in the final data byte are padded with values 0 (toward the high-
order end of the byte). The byte count field specifies the number of complete bytes of data.

Table 40: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01 (drive address)

Function 01 (read coils)

Byte count 02 (2 bytes of data)

Data (coils 40–33) 07

Data (coils 48–41) 06 (STW = 0607hex)

Error check (CRC) –

NOTICE
Coils and registers are addressed explicitly with an offset of -1 in Modbus. For example, coil 33 is addressed as coil 32.

6.1.7.6.2 Read Holding Registers (03 hex)

Description

This function reads the contents of holding registers in the follower.

Query

The query telegram specifies the starting register and quantity of registers to be read. Register addresses start at 0, that is, registers 1–4
are addressed as 0–3.

Example: Read P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum, register 3029. The parameter number is 303.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 91

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 41: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 03 (Read holding registers)

Starting address HI 0B (Register address 3029)

Starting address LO D5 (Register address 3029)

Number of points HI 00

Number of points LO 02 – (P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum is 32 bits long, that is, 2 regis-
ters)

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The register data in the response telegram is packed as 2 bytes per register, with the binary contents right justified within each byte. For
each register, the 1st byte contains the high-order bits, and the 2nd contains the low-order bits.

Example: hex 000088B8 = 35.000 = 35 Hz.

Table 42: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 03

Byte count 04

Data HI (register 3030) 00

Data LO (register 3030) 00

Data HI (register 3031) 88

Data LO (register 3031) B8

Error check (CRC) –

6.1.7.6.3 Force/Write Single Coil (05 hex)

Description

This function forces the coil to either ON or OFF. When broadcast, the function forces the same coil references in all attached followers.

Query

The query telegram specifies the coil 65 (parameter write control) to be forced. Coil addresses start at 0, that is, coil 65 is addressed as 64.
Force data = 00 00 hex (OFF) or FF 00 hex (ON).

92 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 43: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01 (drive address)

Function 05 (write single coil)

Coil address HI 00

Coil address LO 40 (64 decimal) Coil 65

Force data HI FF

Force data LO 00 (FF 00 = ON)

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The normal response is an echo of the query, returned after the coil state has been forced.

Table 44: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 05

Force data HI FF

Force data LO 00

Quantity of coils HI 00

Quantity of coils LO 01

Error check (CRC) –

6.1.7.6.4 Preset Single Register (06 hex)

Description

This function presets a value into a single holding register.

Query

The query telegram specifies the register reference to be preset. Register addresses start at 0, that is, register 1 is addressed as 0.

For example, write to P 5.4.2 Operation Mode, register 999. Register 999 is parameter number * 10-1, as the parameter number is 100 for
P 5.4.2 Operation Mode.

Table 45: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 06

Starting address HI 03 (register address 999)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 93

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 45: Query (continued)

Field name Example (hex)

Starting address LO E7 (register address 999)

Preset data HI 00

Preset data LO 01

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The normal response is an echo of the query, returned after the register contents have been passed.

Table 46: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 06

Register address HI 03

Register address LO E7

Preset data HI 00

Preset data LO 01

Error check (CRC) –

6.1.7.6.5 Preset Multiple Registers (10 hex)

Description

This function presets values into a sequence of holding registers.

Query

The query telegram specifies the register references to be preset. Register addresses start at 0, that is, register 1 is addressed as 0.
Example of a request to preset 2 registers (set P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current to 738 (7.38 A). The parameter number is 124.

Table 47: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 10

Starting address HI 04

Starting address LO D7

Number of registers HI 00

Number of registers LO 02

Byte count 04

94 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 47: Query (continued)

Field name Example (hex)

Write data HI (Register 4: 1049) 00

Write data LO (Register 4: 1049) 00

Write data HI (Register 4: 1050) 02

Write data LO (Register 4: 1050) E2

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The normal response returns the follower address, function code, starting address, and quantity of registers preset.

Table 48: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01

Function 10

Starting address HI 04

Starting address LO 19

Number of registers HI 00

Number of registers LO 02

Error check (CRC) –

6.1.7.6.6 Force/Write Multiple Coils (0F hex)

Description

This function forces each coil in a sequence of coils to either on or off. When broadcasting, the function forces the same coil references in
all attached followers.

Query

The query telegram specifies the coils 17–32 (speed setpoint) to be forced.

NOTICE
Coil addresses start at 0, that is, coil 17 is addressed as 16.

Table 49: Query

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01 (drive address)

Function 0F (write multiple coils)

Coil address HI 00

Coil address LO 10 (coil address 17)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 95

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 49: Query (continued)

Field name Example (hex)

Quantity of coils HI 00

Quantity of coils LO 10 (16 coils)

Byte count 02

Force data HI (Coils 8–1) 20

Force data LO (Coils 16–9) 00 (reference = 2000 hex)

Error check (CRC) –

Response

The normal response returns the follower address, function code, starting address, and quantity of coils forced.

Table 50: Response

Field name Example (hex)

Follower address 01 (drive address)

Function 0F (write multiple coils)

Coil address HI 00

Coil address LO 10 (coil address 17)

Quantity of coils HI 00

Quantity of coils LO 10 (16 coils)

Error check (CRC) –

6.1.8 Danfoss FC Control Profile

6.1.8.1 Control Word According to FC Profile
Modbus Holding Register numbers for Input data – CTW and REF – and output data – STW and MAV – are defined in Table 51:

Table 51: Modbus Holding Register Numbers for Input and Output Data

50000 input data Frequency converter control word register (CTW)

50010 input data Bus reference register (REF)

50200 output data Frequency converter status word register (STW)

50210 output data Frequency converter main value register (MAV)

The input/output data is also available in a lower holding register area:

Table 52: Lower Register Numbers for Input and Output Data

02810 input data Frequency converter control word register (CTW)

02811 input data Bus reference register (REF)

96 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 52: Lower Register Numbers for Input and Output Data (continued)

02910 output data Frequency converter status word register (STW)

02911 output data Frequency converter main value register (MAV)

Master-follower

e30ba274.11
CTW Speed ref.

Bit
no.: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Figure 65: Control Word According to FC Profile

Table 53: Control Word According to FC Profile

Bit Bit value = 0 Bit value = 1

00 Reference value External selection lsb

01 Reference value External selection msb

02 DC brake Ramp

03 Coasting No coasting

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Hold output frequency Use ramp

06 Ramp stop Start

07 No function Reset

08 No function Jog

09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

10 Data invalid Data valid

11 Relay 01 open Relay 01 active

12 Reserved Reserved

13 Parameter setup Selection lsb

14 Reserved Reserved

15 No function Reverse

6.1.8.2 Explanation of Control Word Bit

Bits 00/01

Bits 00 and 01 are used to select among the 4 reference values, which are preprogrammed in P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference according to the
following table.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 97

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 54: Control Bits

Programmed reference value Parameter Bit 01 Bit 00

1 P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference [0] 0 0

2 P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference [1] 0 1

3 P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference [2] 1 0

4 P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference [3] 1 1

NOTICE
In P 5.5.2.7 Preset Reference Select, define how bit 00/01 gates with the corresponding function on the digital inputs.

Bit 02, DC Brake

Bit 02=0: Leads to DC braking and stop. Set braking current and duration in P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current % and P 5.7.3 DC BrakeTime.

Bit 02=1: Leads to ramping.

Bit 03, Coasting

Bit 03=0: The drive immediately releases the motor (the output transistors are shut off ), and it coasts to a standstill.

Bit 03=1: If the other starting conditions are met, the drive starts the motor.

In P 5.5.2.1 Coasting Select, define how bit 03 gates with the corresponding function on a digital input.

Bit 04, Quick Stop

Bit 04=0: Makes the motor speed ramp down to stop (set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time).

Bit 05, Hold Output Frequency

Bit 05=0: The present output frequency (in Hz) freezes. Change the frozen output frequency only with the digital inputs programmed to
[21] Speed up and [22] Speed down(P 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input to P 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input).

NOTICE
If freeze output is active, the drive can only be stopped in 1 of the following ways:
l Bit 03 coast stop.
l Bit 02 DC brake.
l Digital input programmed to [5] DC brake inverse, [2] Coast inverse, or [3] Coast and reset inv (P 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input to P
9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input).

Bit 06, Ramp Stop/Start

Bit 06=0: Causes a stop and makes the motor speed ramp down to stop via the selected ramp-down parameter.

Bit 06=1: Allows the drive to start the motor if the other starting conditions are met.

In P 5.5.2.4 Start Select, define how bit 06 ramp stop/start gates with the corresponding function on a digital input.

Bit 07, Reset

Bit 07=0: No reset.

Bit 07=1: Resets a trip. Reset is activated on the leading signal edge, that is, when changing from logic 0 to logic 1.

98 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Bit 08, Jog

Bit 08=1: P 5.9.2 Jog Speed [Hz] determines the output frequency.

Bit 09, Selection of Ramp 1/2

Bit 09=0: Ramp 1 is active (P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time to P 5.5.4.3 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time).

Bit 09=1: Ramp 2 is active (P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time to P 5.5.4.3 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time).

Bit 10, Data Not Valid/Data Valid

Tell the drive whether to use or ignore the control word.

Bit 10=0: The control word is ignored.

Bit 10=1: The control word is used. This function is relevant because the telegram always contains the control word, regardless of the
telegram type. If the control word is not needed when updating or reading parameter, turn it off.

Bit 11, Relay 01

Bit 11=0: Relay 01 not activated.

Bit 11=1: Relay 01 activated if [36] Control word bit 11 is selected in P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay.

Bit 13, Setup Selection

Use bit 13 to select from the 2 setups according to the following table.

The function is only possible when [9] Multi set-ups is selected in P 6.6.1 Active Set-up.

Table 55: Setup selection

Setup Bit 13

1 0

2 1

NOTICE
To define how bit 13 gates with the corresponding function on the digital inputs, use P 5.5.2.6 Set-up Select.

Bit 14, Torque OK/Limit Exceeded

Bit 14=0: The motor current is lower than the current limit selected in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %.

Bit 14=1: The current limit in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit % is exceeded.

Bit 15, Reverse

Bit 15=0: No reversing.

Bit 15=1: Reversing. In the default setting, reversing is set to [0] Digital input in P 5.5.2.5 Reversing Select. Bit 15 causes reversing only
when [1] Bus, [2] Logic AND, or [3] Logic OR is selected.

6.1.8.3 Status Word According to FC Profile (STW)

Set P 10.1.1 Protocol to [0] FC.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 99

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Follower-master

e30ba273.11
STW Output freq.

Bit
no.: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Figure 66: Status Word

Table 56: Status Word According to FC Profile

Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1

00 Control not ready Control ready

01 Drive not ready Drive ready

02 Coasting Enable

03 No error Trip

04 No error Error (no trip)

05 Reserved –

06 No error Triplock

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed≠reference Speed=reference

09 Local operation Bus control

10 Out of frequency limit Frequency limit OK

11 No operation In operation

12 Drive OK Stopped, auto start

13 Voltage OK Voltage exceeded

14 Torque OK Torque exceeded

15 Timer OK Timer exceeded

6.1.8.4 Explanation of Status Word Bit

Bit 00, Control Not Ready/Ready

Bit 00=0: The drive trips.

Bit 00=1: The drive controls are ready but the power component does not necessarily receive any supply (if there is 24 V external supply
to controls).

Bit 01, Drive Ready

Bit 01=0: The drive is not ready.

Bit 01=1: The drive is ready for operation, but the coasting command is active via the digital inputs or via serial communication.

Bit 02, Coast Stop

Bit 02=0: The drive releases the motor.

100 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Bit 02=1: The drive starts the motor with a start command.

Bit 03, No Error/Trip

Bit 03=0: The drive is not in fault mode.

Bit 03=1: The drive trips. To re-establish operation, press [Reset].

Bit 04, No Error/Error (No Trip)

Bit 04=0: The drive is not in fault mode.

Bit 04=1: The drive shows an error but does not trip.

Bit 05, Not Used

Bit 05 is not used in the status word.

Bit 06, No Error/Trip lock

Bit 06=0: The drive is not in fault mode.

Bit 06=1: The drive is tripped and locked.

Bit 07, No Warning/Warning

Bit 07=0: There are no warnings.

Bit 07=1: A warning has occurred.

Bit 08, Speed ≠ Reference/Speed=Reference

Bit 08=0: The motor runs, but the present speed is different from the preset speed reference. It might happen when the speed ramps up/
down during start/stop.

Bit 08=1: The motor speed matches the preset speed reference.

Bit 09, Local Operation/Bus Control

Bit 09=0: [Stop/Reset] is activated on the control unit or [2] Local in P 5.5.3.6 Reference Site is selected. It is not possible to control the
drive via serial communication.

Bit 09=1: It is possible to control the drive via the fieldbus/serial communication.

Bit 10, Out of Frequency Limit

Bit 10=0: The output frequency has reached the value in P 5.8.3 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] or P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

Bit 10=1: The output frequency is within the defined limits.

Bit 11, No Operation/In Operation

Bit 11=0: The motor is not running.

Bit 11=1: The drive has a start signal or the output frequency is greater than 0 Hz.

Bit 12, Drive OK/Stopped, Auto Start

Bit 12=0: There is no temporary overtemperature on the drive.

Bit 12=1: The drive stops because of overtemperature but the unit does not trip and resumes operation once the overtemperature
normalizes.

Bit 13, Voltage OK/Limit Exceeded

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 101

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Bit 13=0: There are no voltage warnings.

Bit 13=1: The DC voltage in the drive’s DC link is too low or too high.

Bit 14, Torque OK/Limit Exceeded

Bit 14=0: The motor current is lower than the current limit selected in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %.

Bit 14=1: The current limit in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit % is exceeded.

Bit 15, Timer OK/Limit Exceeded

Bit 15=0: The timers for motor thermal protection and thermal protection are not exceeded 100%.

Bit 15=1: 1 of the timers exceeds 100%.

6.1.8.5 Bus Speed Reference Value

Speed reference value is transmitted to the drive in a relative value in %. The value is transmitted in the form of a 16-bit word. The integer
value 16384 (4000 hex) corresponds to 100%. Negative figures are formatted using 2’s complement. The actual output frequency (MAV)
is scaled in the same way as the bus reference.

Master-follower
e30ba276.11

16 bit

CTW Speed reference

Follower-follower

STW Actual output frequency

Figure 67: Actual Output Frequency (MAV)

The reference and MAV are scaled as follows:

-100% 0% 100%

(C000hex) (0hex) (4000hex) e30bk132.10

P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range

Reverse Forward
(1) -max- +max

P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 0 P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum

Max reference Max reference

0% 100%

(0hex) (4000hex)

P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range

Forward
(0) min-max

P 5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum

Min reference Max reference

Figure 68: Reference and MAV

102 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

6.2 How to Control the Drive

6.2.1 Introduction
This section describes codes which can be used in the function and data fields of a Modbus RTU telegram.

6.2.2 Function Codes Supported by Modbus RTU

Modbus RTU supports use of the following function codes in the function field of a telegram:

Table 57: Function Codes

Function Function code (hex)

Read coils 1

Read holding registers 3

Write single coil 5

Write single register 6

Write multiple coils F

Write multiple registers 10

Get comm. event counter B

Report follower ID 11

Read write multiple registers 17

Table 58: Function Codes

Function Function code Subfunction code Subfunction

Diagnostics 8 1 Restart communication.

2 Return diagnostic register.

10 Clear counters and diagnostic

register.

11 Return bus message count.

12 Return bus communication er-

ror count.

13 Return follower error count.

14 Return follower message

count.

6.2.3 Modbus Exception Codes

For a full explanation of the structure of an exception code response, refer to 6.1.7.4.5 Function Field.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 103

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 59: Modbus Exception Codes

Code Name Meaning

1 Illegal function The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server (or follower). This may
be because the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented in the
unit selected. It could also indicate that the server (or follower) is in the wrong state to process a re-
quest of this type, for example, because it is not configured and is being asked to return register val-
ues.

2 Illegal data ad- The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server (or follower). More
dress specifically, the combination of reference number and transfer length is invalid. For a controller with
100 registers, a request with offset 96 and length 4 succeeds, while a request with offset 96 and length
5 generates exception 02.

3 Illegal data value A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for server (or follower). This indi-
cates a fault in the structure of the remainder of a complex request, such as that the implied length is
incorrect. It does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a register has a value outside the
expectation of the application program, since the Modbus protocol is unaware of the significance of
any value of any register.

4 Follower device An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or follower) was attempting to perform the re-
failure quested action.

104 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7 Parameter Descriptions
7.1 Reading the Parameter Table
The application guide includes the parameter tables. The following descriptions explain how to read the parameters.

1 P 2.1.1 DC-Link Voltage

e30bk172.11
2 View the DC Link voltage in the drive

3 Default value: 0 6 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

4
Parameter 1630 7 Unit: V
number:

5 Data type: uint 32 8 Access type: Read

Figure 69: Reading the Parameter Table

1 indicates the parameter name and parameter index, and starts with a P.

2 indicates the parameter description which is visible in MyDrive® Insight help text.

3 indicates the default setting from the factory.

4 indicates the unique parameter number which is relevant for modbus registers. See 6.1.6.2.8 Parameter Number (PNU) and 6.1.7.5.1
Parameter Handling.

5 indicates the data type of the parameter. See 7.1.2 Understanding Data Types.

6 indicates the type of parameter. Parameters have either defined ranges or selections. See 7.1.1 Understanding Parameter Types.

7 indicates the unit of the parameter.

8 indicates the access type of the parameter. See 7.1.3 Understanding Access Types.

7.1.1 Understanding Parameter Types

Following are the different type of parameter information.

Table 60: Parameter Types and Description

Parameter Type Description

Selection The parameter provides a list of selections for the user to select.

Range (0–255) The value of the parameter is within the specified range. In the example specified, the user can set any value 0–
255, for the parameter.

7.1.2 Understanding Data Types

Following is an overview of the data types used in iC2 application software.

Table 61: Overview on data type

Data type Description Type Range

enum Enumeration 0,1,2....

int Integer 8, 16, 32 -32768...32767

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 105

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 61: Overview on data type (continued)

Data type Description Type Range

uint Unsigned integer 8, 16, 32 0 up to 65535

visStr Visible string All strings

7.1.3 Understanding Access Types

Following are the access type of parameters and descriptions.

Table 62: Access Types and Descriptions

Access type Descriptions

Read/Write The setting of the parameter is readable or changeable.

Read The parameter information is only readable.

7.2 Grid (Menu Index 1)

7.2.1 Grid Settings (Menu Index 1.2)
P 1.2.1 Regional Settings

Use the parameter to configure regional settings. Select [0] International to set P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency to 50 Hz. Select [1] North
America to set P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency to 60 Hz.

Default value: 0 [International] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 3 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 International Default value of P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency is set to 50 Hz.

1 North America Default value of P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency is set to 60 Hz.

P 1.2.2 Grid Type

Select the supply voltage, frequency, and type.

Default value: 12 [380-440V/50Hz] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 6 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

106 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 200-240V/50Hz/IT-grid

1 200-240V/50Hz/Delta

2 200-240V/50Hz

5 100-110V/50Hz/IT-grid

6 100-110V/50Hz/Delta

7 100-110V/50Hz

10 380-440V/50Hz/IT-grid

11 380-440V/50Hz/Delta

12 380-440V/50Hz

20 440-480V/50Hz/IT-grid

21 440-480V/50Hz/Delta

22 440-480V/50Hz

100 200-240V/60Hz/IT-grid

101 200-240V/60Hz/Delta

102 200-240V/60Hz

105 100-110V/60Hz/IT-grid

106 100-110V/60Hz/Delta

107 100-110V/60Hz

110 380-440V/60Hz/IT-grid

111 380-440V/60Hz/Delta

112 380-440V/60Hz

120 440-480V/60Hz/IT-grid

121 440-480V/60Hz/Delta

122 440-480V/60Hz

7.2.2 Grid Protection (Menu Index 1.3)

P 1.3.1 Mains Imbalance Action

Select an action of frequency converter on detecting a severe mains imbalance. Operation during severe mains imbalance reduces the
lifetime of the frequency converter. When selecting [4] Fast Trip or [5] Fast Warning, P 1.2.1 Regional settings must match the frequency
of actual grid to avoid false faults.

Conditions are considered severe if the motor is operated continuously near nominal load (for example, a pump or fan running near full
speed).

Default value: 0 [Trip] Parameter type: Selection

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 107

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1412 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Trip Trips the frequency converter.

1 Warning Issue a warning.

2 Disabled No action is taken.

4 Fast Trip Enable the fast detection to trip the frequency converter. The
option is related to P 2.3.9 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level and P
2.3.10 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min Power.

5 Fast Warning Enable the fast detection to issue a warning. The option is related
to P 2.3.9 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level and P 2.3.10 Fast Mains
Phase Loss Min Power.

7.3 Power Conversion & DC-link (Menu Index 2)

7.3.1 Status (Menu Index 2.1)
P 2.1.1 DC-Link voltage

View the DC-link voltage in the drive.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1630 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 2.1.2 Inverter Thermal

View the percentage of thermal load on the frequency converter.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–255)

Parameter 1635 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read

P 2.1.3 Unit Nominal Current

View the inverter nominal current, which should match the nameplate data on the connected motor. The data is used for calculation of
torque and motor overload protection.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.00–655.35)

108 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1636 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 2.1.5 Output Current Limit %

View the inverter maximum current, which should match the nameplate data on the connected motor. The data is used for calculation of
torque and motor protection.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.00–655.35)

Parameter 1637 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 2.1.9 Heatsink Temperature

View the frequency converter heat sink temperature.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-128–127)

Parameter 1634 Unit: °C

number:

Data type: int8 Access type: Read

P 2.1.10 Real-time Switching Frequency

View the actual switching frequency. The actual switching frequency could not be same with the set value in P 2.4.3 Switching Frequency
due to internal derating.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–32)

Parameter 1866 Unit: kHz

number:

Data type: int8 Access type: Read

7.3.2 Protection (Menu Index 2.3)

P 2.3.1 Overvoltage Controller Enable

Select to enable or disable Overvoltage Control (OVC), to reduce the risk of the frequency converter to trip due to an overvoltage on the
DC link caused by generative power from load.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 217 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 109

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled No OVC required.

1 Enabled (not at stop) Activate OVC except when using a stop signal to stop the
frequency converter.

2 Enable Activate OVC.

CAUTION
PERSONAL INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Enabling OVC in hoisting applications may lead to
personal injuries and equipment damage.
l DO NOT enable OVC in hoisting applications.

P 2.3.2 Overvoltage Controller Kp

This parameter enables to fine-tune the overvoltage gain for P 2.3.1 Overvoltage Control. It is not necessary to change this parameter for
normal applications.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–1000)

Parameter 219 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action

Select the action of frequency converter when the mains voltage drops below the limit set in P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit.

Default value: 0 [No function] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1410 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

This parameter is typically used where short mains interruptions (voltage dips) are present. At 100% load and a short voltage
interruption, the DC voltage on the main capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency converters, it only takes a few milliseconds before
the DC level is down to about 373 V DC and the IGBTs cut off and lose control of the motor. When mains is restored, and the IGBTs start
again, the output frequency and voltage vector do not correspond to the speed/frequency of the motor, and the result is normally an
overvoltage or overcurrent, mostly resulting in a trip lock. P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action can be programmed to avoid this situation. Select
the function to which the frequency converter must act when the threshold in P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action at mains fault has been reached.

The following are the selections for the parameter.

110 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Function The frequency converter does not compensate for a mains

interruption. The voltage on the DC link drops quickly, and the
motor is lost within milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the
result.

1 Ctrl. Ramp-down The frequency converter retains control of the motor and does a
controlled ramp down from P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit.
The ramp follows the setting in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time.
This selection is useful in pump applications, where the inertia is
low and the friction is high. When mains is restored, the output
frequency ramps the motor up to the reference speed (if the
mains interruption is prolonged, the controlled ramp down
might take down the output frequency to 0 RPM, and when the
mains is restored, the application is ramped up from 0 RPM to the
previous reference speed via the normal ramp up). If the energy
in the DC link disappears before the motor is ramped to 0, the
motor is coasted.

2 Ctrl. Ramp-down, Trip This selection is similar to selection [1] Ctrl. ramp-down, except
that in [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, Trip a reset is necessary for starting
up after power-up.

3 Coasting Centrifuges can run for an hour without supply. In those

situations, it is possible to select a coast function at mains
interruption, together with a flying start, which occurs when the
mains is restored.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 111

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

4 Kinetic Back-up Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency converter keeps
running as long as there is energy in the system due to the
inertia from motor and load. This is done by converting the
mechanical energy to the DC link and thereby maintaining
control of the frequency converter and motor. This can extend
the controlled operation, depending on the inertia in the system.
For fans, it is typically several seconds, for pumps up to 2 s and
for compressors only for a fraction of a second. Many industry
applications can extend controlled operation for many seconds,
which is often enough time for the mains to return.
The DC-level during [4] Kinetic backup is P 2.3.7 Power Loss
Controller Limit x 1.35. If the mains does not return, UDC is
maintained as long as possible by ramping the speed down
towards 0 RPM. Finally, the frequency converter coasts. If mains
returns while in kinetic backup, UDC increases above P 2.3.7
Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35. This is detected in 1 of the
following ways:
• If UDC > P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35 x 1.05
• If the speed is above the reference. This is relevant if mains
comes back at a lower level than before, for example, P 2.3.7
Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35 x 1.02. This does not fulfill
the criterion above, and the frequency converter tries to
reduce UDC to P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35 by
increasing the speed. This does not succeed as mains cannot
be lowered.
• If running motoric. The same mechanism as in the previous
point, but where the inertia avoids the speed from going
above the reference speed. This leads to the motor running
motoric until the speed is above the reference speed, and the
above situation occurs. Instead of waiting for that, the present
criterion is introduced.

5 Kinetic Back-up, Trip The difference between kinetic backup with and without trip is
that the latter always ramps down to 0 RPM and trips, regardless
of whether mains return or not. The function is made so that it
does not even detect if mains return. This is the reason for the
relatively high level on the DC link during ramp down.

112 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

6 Fault

7 Kin. Back-up, Trip with Recovery Kinetic backup with recovery combines the features of kinetic
backup and kinetic backup with trip. This feature makes it
possible to select between kinetic backup and kinetic backup
with trip based on a recovery speed, which is configurable in
P 2.3.8 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level to enable detection of
mains returning. If the mains does not return, the frequency
converter ramps down to 0 RPM and trips. If mains return while
kinetic backup is at a speed above the value set in P 2.3.8 Kin.
Backup Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is resumed. This
is equal to [4] Kinetic Backup. The DC level during [7] Kinetic
backup is P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35. If mains
return while kinetic backup is at a speed below P 2.3.8 Kin.
Backup Trip Recovery Level, the frequency converter ramps down
to 0 RPM using the ramp and then trips.

P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit

Enter the mains voltage at which the function selected in P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action is activated. This parameter defines the threshold
voltage at which the selected function in P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action is activated. Based on the supply quality, consider to select 90% of the
nominal mains as the detection level. For a supply of 380 V, P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit should be set to 342 V. This results in a DC
detection level of 462 V (P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit x 1.35).

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (100–800)

Parameter 1411 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.3.8 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level

Enter the kinetic backup trip recovery level for the application. This recovery level is the minimum speed of the motor at which the
frequency converter is to ramp up the speed.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 1415 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.3.9 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level

Tuning the parameter to a smaller value makes the detection more sensitive and tuning the parameter to a larger value makes the
detection to be less sensitive.

Default value: 300 Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 1417 Unit: %

number:

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 113

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.3.10 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min. Power

Fast detection is not activated if the actual power is lower than the value specified in the parameter.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 1418 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.3.13 Auto DC Braking

Protective function against overvoltage at coast in IT grid environment. This parameter is active only when [1] On is selected in this
parameter, and IT grid options are selected in P 1.2.2 Grid Type.

Default value: 1 [On] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 7 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off The function is not active.

1 On The function is active.

P 2.3.14 Max Output Frequency

Enter the maximum output frequency value. P 2.3.14 Max Output Frequency specifies the absolute limit on the frequency converter
output frequency for improved safety in applications where accidental over-speeding must be avoided. This absolute limit applies to all
configurations and is independent of the setting in P 5.4.2 Configuration Mode.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 419 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
The parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. Maximum output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter
switching frequency in P 2.4.3 Switching Frequency.

P 2.3.15 Action at Inverter Fault

Select how the frequency converter reacts when an overvoltage, overcurrent, short circuit, or grounding fault occurs.

Default value: 1 [Warning] Parameter type: Selection

114 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1427 Unit: V

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Trip Disable the protection filters and trip at the 1st fault.

1 Warning Run the protection filters normally.

P 2.3.16 Function at Inverter Overload

When the frequency converter issues an inverter overload warning, select whether to continue and probably trip the frequency
converter or derate the output current.

Default value: 0 [Trip] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1461 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

0 Trip

1 Derate

P 2.3.17 Adjustable Temperature Warning

This parameter is used to warn about the heat sink temperature is high, that is, high ambient temperature or higher load. A trip could
happen if the condition is not rectified. When P 2.1.9 Heat Sink Temperatureplus the value set in the parameter exceed the maximum
value, HEATSINK_CLEAN_WARNING - bit 29 is set in P 5.1.10 Ext. Status Word. The control panel warning indicator light is not turned on
when the specified limit of the parameter is reached.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 442 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

7.3.3 Modulation (Menu Index 2.4)

P 2.4.2 Min. Switching Frequency

Set the lowest switching frequency allowed by the application.

Default value: 2 [2.0 KHz] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1463 Unit: –

number:

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 115

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

2 2.0 KHz

3 3.0 KHz

4 4.0 KHz

5 5.0 KHz

6 6.0 KHz

7 8.0 KHz

8 10.0 KHz

9 12.0 KHz

10 16.0 KHz

P 2.4.3 Switching Frequency

Adjust the switching frequency to find a suitable balance between the acoustic noise from the motor and thermal losses in the frequency
converter. Increasing the switching frequency reduces the noise, but increases thermal losses.

Default value: 4 [4.0 KHz] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1401 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name (Size Related)

2 2.0 KHz

3 3.0 KHz

4 4.0 KHz

5 5.0 KHz

6 6.0 KHz

7 8.0 KHz

8 10.0 KHz

9 12.0 KHz

10 16.0 KHz

NOTICE
The actual open switching frequency selections depend on the specific drive model.

116 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 2.4.5 Over Modulation

Use the parameter to enable or disable overmodulation of the output voltage. Select [1] On to obtain extra DC-link voltage and torque
on the motor shaft. Select [0] Off to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft.

Default value: 1 [On] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1403 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off To avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft, select [0] Off for no
overmodulation of the output voltage. This feature may be useful
for applications such as grinding machines.

1 On Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function for the

output voltage. Select this setting when it is required that the
output voltage is >95% of the input voltage (typical when
running oversynchronously). The output voltage is increased
according to the degree of overmodulation.

NOTICE
Overmodulation leads to increased torque ripple as
harmonics are increased.

7.3.4 DC-Link Control (Menu Index 2.5)

P 2.5.1 Damping Gain Factor

Damping factor for DC link voltage compensation. See P 2.5.2 DC-Link Voltage Compensation.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 1408 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.5.2 DC-Link Voltage Compensation

Enable DC-link compensation to reduce ripple in the DC-link voltage (recommended for most applications).

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1451 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 117

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 On

7.3.5 Output Current Limit (Menu Index 2.7)

P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %

Enter the current limit for motor and generator operation. The parameter is changed automatically if P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Motor Current is
updated.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–1000)

Parameter 418 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

This is a true current limit function that continues in the oversynchronous range. However, due to field weakening, the motor torque at
current limit drops accordingly when the voltage increase stops above the synchronized motor speed.

P 2.7.2 Current Limit Kp

Enter the proportional gain for the current limit controller. Selecting a higher value makes the controller react faster but may reduce
stability.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 1430 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.7.3 Current Limit Ti

Enter the integration time for the current limit controller. Selecting a lower value makes the controller react faster but may reduce
stability.

Default value: 0.02 Parameter type: Range (0.002–2.000)

Parameter 1431 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.7.4 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

Enter the filter time period for the low-pass filter of the current limit control. The filter uses the average value over the period. Setting a
shorter period makes the control react faster to changes in current.

Default value: 5 Parameter type: Range (1.0–100.0)

Parameter 1432 Unit: ms

number:

118 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 2.7.5 Trip Delay at Current Limit

When the output current reaches the current limit (P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %), a warning is triggered. If the current limit warning is
continuously present for the period specified in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. Enter 60 s = OFF to disable the feature.

Default value: 60 Parameter type: Range (0–60)

Parameter 1424 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

7.4 Filters & Brake Chopper (Menu Index 3)

7.4.1 Status (Menu Index 3.1)
P 3.1.1 Brake Energy

View the brake power transmitted to an external brake resistor. The mean power is calculated on an average basis for the most recent
120 s.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0.000–10000.000)

Parameter 1633 Unit: kW

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

7.4.2 Brake Chopper (Menu Index 3.2)

P 3.2.1 Enable Brake Chopper

Select method for dissipation of excess brake energy.

Default value: 0 [Disable] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 215 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

0 Disable

1 Enable

P 3.2.2 Brake Chopper Voltage Reduce

This parameter can reduce the DC voltage where the brake resistor is active. It is only valid for T4 unit.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 119

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 214 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.4.3 Brake Resistor (Menu Index 3.3)

P 3.3.2 Brake Resistor Value

Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This value is used for monitoring the power to the brake resistor. P 3.3.2 Brake Resistor Value is only
active in frequency converters with an integral dynamic brake. Use this parameter for values without decimals.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 211 Unit: Ω

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 3.3.3 Brake Resistor Power Limit

Set the monitoring limit of the brake power transmitted to the resistor. This parameter is only active in drives with an integral dynamic
brake.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.001–2000)

Parameter 212 Unit: kW

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

To calculate the value of the P 3.3.3 Brake Power Limit, the following formula can be used.

The following are the elements of the formula:

l Pbr, avg is the average power dissipated in the brake resistor.

l Rbr is the resistance of the brake resistor.
l tbr is the active breaking time within the 120 s period Tbr.
l Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake resistor is active.
For T4 units, the DC voltage is 770 V, which can be reduced by P 3.2.2 Brake Chopper Voltage Reduce .

NOTICE
If Rbr is not known or if Tbr is different from 120 s, the practical approach is to run the brake application, readout P 3.1.1 Brake
Energy, and then enter this value + 20% in P 3.3.3 Brake Resistor Power Limit.

Selection of a low value reduces energy loss in the motor but can also reduce resistance to sudden load changes. The P 4.4.1.3 Torque
Characteristic must be set to AEO.

120 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.5 Motor (Menu Index 4)

7.5.1 Status (Menu Index 4.1)
P 4.1.1 Motor Current

View the motor current measured as a mean value, Irms.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–655.35)

Parameter 1614 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 4.1.2 Motor Voltage

View the motor voltage, a calculated value used for controlling the motor.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1612 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.3 Motor Electrical Power

Motor power consumption in kW. The value shown is calculated on basis of the actual DC-link voltage and DC-link current.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (0.000–1000.000)

Parameter 1610 Unit: kW

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.4 Motor Power Hp

Motor power consumption in kW. The value shown is calculated on basis of the actual DC-link voltage and DC-link current.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (0.000–1000.000)

Parameter 1611 Unit: Hp

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.5 Motor Thermal Load

View the calculated motor temperature in percentage of allowed maximum. At 100% a trip will occur, if the ETR function selected in P
4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 1618 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 121

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 4.1.6 Frequency

View the actual motor frequency value.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–6553.5)

Parameter 1613 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.7 Frequency %

View the actual motor frequency as a percentage of P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0–6553.5)

Parameter 1615 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 4.1.8 Motor Shaft Speed

View the actual motor RPM. In open loop or closed-loop process control the motor RPM is estimated. In speed closed-loop modes the
motor RPM is measured.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-30000.0–30000.0)

Parameter 1617 Unit: RPM

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.10 Motor Torque

View the torque value with sign, applied to the motor shaft. Some motors supply more than 160% torque. As a result, the minimum value
and the maximum value depend on the maximum motor current and the motor used.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-30000.0–30000.0)

Parameter 1616 Unit: Nm

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 4.1.11 Motor Torque %

View the torque in percent of nominal torque, with sign, applied to the motor shaft.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-200–200)

Parameter 1622 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

122 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.5.2 Motor Data (Menu Index 4.2)

7.5.2.1 General Settings (Menu Index 4.2.1)
P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type

Select the motor type. Select [0] Asynchronous Induction Motor, IM for asynchronous motors. Select [1] PM, Non-salient SPM or [3] PM,
Salient IPM for salient or non-salient PM motors. PM motors are divided into 2 groups, with either surface mounted (non-salient) or
interior (salient) magnets.

Default value: 0 [Asynchronous Induction Motor, IM] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 110 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Asynchronous Induction Motor, IM For asynchronous Induction Motor, IM.

1 PM, Non-salient SPM For permanent magnet (PM) motors with surface-mounted (non-
salient) magnets. Refer to P 4.4.4.7 Damping Gain to P 4.4.4.10
Voltage filter time const. for details about optimizing the motor
operation.

3 PM, Salient IPM For permanent magnet (PM) motors with interior (salient)
magnets.

P 4.2.1.2 Number of Pole

Enter the number of motor poles.

Default value: 4 Parameter type: Range (2–100)

Parameter 139 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

The dependency of the motor’s synchronous speed ns in RPM of the frequency f of the supply in Hz (P 1.1.1 Grid Frequency) and the
number of pole pairs p in P 4.2.1.2 Nameplate Data are given by the following formula:

P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency*120/P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed

For example, for a motor with 2-pole pairs (4 poles) and a frequency of the power supply of 50 Hz, the synchronous speed of the motor is
1500 RPM. The following table shows the number of pole pairs for normal speed ranges of various motor types.

Pole pairs ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@ 60 Hz

1 2700–2880 3250–3460

2 1350–1450 1625–1730

3 700–960 840–1153

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 123

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 4.2.1.3 AMA Mode

Select type of AMA. The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automatically optimizing the advanced motor
parameters. Select either [0] No Function, [1] Enable Complete AMA, [2] Enable Reduced AMA.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 129 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off No Function.

1 Enable Complete AMA Depending on the option selected in P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type, the
AMA is performed on different parameters.
• If [0] Asynchron is selected, the AMA is performed on: P 4.2.3.1
Stator Resistance (Rs), P 4.2.3.2 Rotor Resistance (Rr). P 4.2.3.4
Stator Leakage Reactance (X1). P 4.2.3.6 Main Reactance (Xh).
• If [1] PM, non-salient SPM is selected, the AMA is performed
on: P 4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance (Rs).P 4.2.4.3 daxis Inductance
(Ld).
• If [3] PM, salient IPM is selected, the AMA is performed on: P
4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance (Rs). P 4.2.4.3 daxis Inductance (Ld),
P 4.2.4.7 qaxis Inductance (Lq), P 4.2.4.4 daxis Inductance Sat.
(LdSat) , P 4.2.4.8 qaxis Inductance Sat. (LqSat).

2 Enable Reduced AMA Perform a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs. P 4.2.3.1
Stator Resistance (Rs) in the system only. (This option is only for
asynchronous motors). Perform AMA on cold motor.

NOTICE
The parameter automatically switches back to Off after the AMA has been performed.

P 4.2.1.4 Motor Cable Length

Enter the length of the motor cable in unit meters.

Default value: 50 Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 142 Unit: m

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.1.5 Motor Cable Length Feet

Motor cable length.

Default value: 164 Parameter type: Range (0–328)

124 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 143 Unit: Ft

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

In some products, depending on the EMC configuration, this parameter may adjust the allowable switching frequency automatically to
achieve optimum performance of the drive system.

7.5.2.2 Nameplate Data (Menu Index 4.2.2)

P 4.2.2.1 Nominal Power

Set the nominal motor power from the motor nameplate data. Note: Changing this parameter affects the settings of other parameters.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 120 Unit: kW

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.2.2 Nominal Voltage

Set the nominal motor voltage from the motor nameplate data. Note: Changing this parameter affects settings of other parameters.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (50–1000)

Parameter 122 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current

Enter the nominal motor current value from the motor nameplate data. Note: Changing this parameter affects the settings of other
parameters.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–1000.00)

Parameter 124 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency

Select the motor frequency value from the motor nameplate data. Note: Changing this parameter affects settings of other parameters.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 123 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed

Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data. Note: Changing this parameter affects settings of other
parameters.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 125

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 125 Unit: RPM

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.5.2.3 Async. Induction Motor (Menu Index 4.2.3)

P 4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance Rs

Set the stator resistance value. Enter the value from a motor datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold motor.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 130 Unit: Ω

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.3.2 Rotor Resistance Rr

Enter the rotor resistance value. Obtain the value from a motor datasheet or by performing an AMA on a cold motor. The default setting
is calculated by the drive from motor nameplate data.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 131 Unit: Ω

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.3.4 Stator Leakage Reactance X1

Set the stator leakage reactance value. Enter the value from a motor datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold motor. The default setting is
calculated by the drive from motor nameplate data.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 133 Unit: Ω

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.3.6 Main Reactance Xh

Set the main reactance value. Enter the value from a motor datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold motor. The default setting is
calculated by the drive from motor nameplate data.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 135 Unit: Ω

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.3.7 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

126 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Enter the value from the motor nameplate data. This parameter is available only when P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type is set to [1] PM, Non-salient
PM.

Note: Changing this parameter affects the settings of other parameters.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.1–10000.0)

Parameter 126 Unit: Nm

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.5.2.4 Permanent Magnet Motor (Menu Index 4.2.4)

P 4.2.4.1 Back EMF

Set the nominal back EMF for the motor when running at 1000 RPM. Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM motor when no
frequency converter is connected, and the shaft is turned externally.

Back EMF is normally specified for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM measured between 2 lines.

If the value is not available for a motor speed of 1000 RPM, calculate the correct value as follows. If back EMF is, for example, 320 V at
1800 RPM, it can be calculated as 1000 RPM: Back EMF = (Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 = 178.

This parameter is only active when P 4.2.1.1 Motor Construction is set to options that enable PM (Permanent Magnet) motors.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 140 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
When using PM motors, it is recommended to use brake resistors.

P 4.2.4.3 d-axis Inductance Ld

Enter the value of the d-axis inductance. Obtain the value from the permanent magnet motor datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold
motor.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 137 Unit: mH

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.4.4 d-axis Inductance LdSat

This parameter corresponds to the inductance saturation of Ld. Ideally, this parameter has the same value as P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current.
However, if motor supplier provides an inductance curve, the inductance value at 100% of P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current should be entered
here.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 127

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 144 Unit: mH

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.4.6 Ld Current Point

Specify the saturation curve of the d-axis inductance values. The d-axis inductance value is linearly approximated to P 4.2.4.3 d-axis
Inductance Ld.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 148 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.4.7 q-axis Inductance Lq

Enter the value of the q-axis inductance. Obtain the value from the permanent magnet motor data sheet or perform an AMA on a cold
motor.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 138 Unit: mH

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.4.8 q-axis Inductance LqSat

This parameter corresponds to the inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally, this parameter has the same value as P 4.2.4.7 q-axis Inductance
Lq. When the motor supplier provides an inductance curve, the inductance value at 100% of P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current should be
specified.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 145 Unit: mH

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.2.4.10 Lq Current Point

Specify the saturation curve of the q-axis inductance values. The q-axis inductance value is linearly approximated to P 4.2.4.7 q-axis
Inductance Lq and P 4.2.4.8 q-axis Inductance LqSat.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 149 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

128 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.5.3 Motor Control (Menu Index 4.4)

7.5.3.1 General Settings (Menu Index 4.4.1)
P 4.4.1.2 AEO Minimum Magnetization

Enter the minimum allowed magnetization for the automatic energy optimization (AEO) mode. Selecting a low value reduces energy loss
in the motor, but also reduces resistance to sudden load changes.

Default value: 40 Parameter type: Range (10–100)

Parameter 1441 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.1.3 Torque Characteristic

Select the torque characteristic. Variable Torque and Auto Energy Optim. CT are both energy saving operations.

Default value: 0 [Constant Torque] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 103 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Constant Torque Motor shaft output provides constant torque under variable
speed control.

1 Variable Torque Motor shaft output provides variable torque under variable
speed control. Set the variable torque level in P 4.4.4.13 VT Level.

2 Auto Energy Optim. CT Automatically optimizes energy consumption by minimizing

magnetization and frequency via P 4.4.1.2 AEO Minimum
Magnetisation.

P 4.4.1.4 Clockwise Direction

This parameter defines the term clockwise corresponding to the control panel direction arrow. The parameter is used to easily change
direction of shaft rotation without swapping motor wires.

Default value: 0 [Normal] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 106 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 129

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Normal The motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when frequency

converter is connected U⇒U; V⇒V; and W⇒W to motor.

1 Inverse The motor shaft turns in counterclockwise direction when

frequency converter is connected U⇒U; V⇒V; and W⇒W to
motor.

P 4.4.1.5 Motor Control Bandwidth

Select type of motor control bandwidth.

Default value: 1 [Medium] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 108 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 High For high dynamic response.

1 Medium Optimized for smooth steady state operation.

2 Low Optimized for smooth steady state operation with lowest

dynamic response.

3 Adaptive 1 Optimized for smooth steady state operation, with extra active
damping.

4 Adaptive 2 Focuses on low-inductance PM motors. This option is an

alternative to [3] Adaptive 1.

7.5.3.2 AC-Brake (Menu Index 4.4.2)

P 4.4.2.1 Enable AC Brake

Select the method for dissipation of excess brake energy.

Default value: 0 [Disable] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 210 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

0 Disable

1 Enable

P 4.4.2.2 AC Brake, Max current

130 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Enter the maximum allowed current when using AC brake to avoid overheating of motor windings.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–160)

Parameter 216 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
The parameter is only available for induction motors.

P 4.4.2.3 AC Brake Voltage Control Kp

Use the parameter to set AC brake power capability (set ramp-down time when inertia is constant). If the DC-link voltage is not higher
than the DC-link voltage warning value, the generator torque can be adjusted with this parameter. The higher the AC-brake gain is, the
stronger the brake capability is. It equals 1.0 means that there is no AC-brake capability.

Default value: 1.4 Parameter type: Range (1.0–2.0)

Parameter 188 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
If there is continuous generator torque, there is a higher risk of causing high motor current which leads to a hot motor. Use P
4.4.2.2 AC Brake, Max current to protect the motor from overheating.

7.5.3.3 U/f Curve (Menu Index 4.4.3)

P 4.4.3.1 Voltage Point

Enter the voltage at each frequency point to manually form a U/f characteristic matching the motor. The frequency points are defined in
P 4.4.3.2 Frequency Point.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–1000)

Parameter 155 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.3.2 Frequency Point

Enter the frequency points to manually form a U/f characteristic matching the motor. The voltage at each point is defined in P 4.4.3.1
Voltage Point.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 156 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 131

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Make a U/f characteristic based on 6 definable voltages and frequencies. See figure below.

Voltage Point

e30bk133.10
P 4.4.3.1 [x]

P 4.4.3.1 [5]
P 4.4.3.1 [4]

P 4.4.3.1 [3]

P 4.4.3.1 [2]

P 4.4.3.1 [1]
P 4.4.3.1 [0]

P 4.4.3.2 P 4.4.3.2 P 4.4.3.2 P 4.4.3.2 P 4.4.3.2 P 4.4.3.2

[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Frequency Point
P 4.4.3.2 [x]

Figure 70: Example of U/f Characteristic

7.5.3.4 Dependent Setting (Menu Index 4.4.4)

P 4.4.4.1 Slip Comp. Gain

Enter the % value for slip compensation to compensate for tolerances in the value of nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automatically,
that is, based on the rated motor speed nM,N. This function is not active when P 5.4.2 Configuration Mode is set to [1] Speed closed loop,
[2] Torque closed loop, or [4] Torque open loop, or when P 5.4.3 Motor Control Principle is set to [0] U/f, or when P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type is
set to [1] PM, Non-salient SPM or [3] PM, Salient IPM.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 162 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.2 Slip Comp. Time Constant

Enter the slip compensation reaction speed. A high value results in slow reaction, and a low value results in quick reaction. If low-
frequency resonance problems occur, use a longer time setting.

Default value: 0.10 Parameter type: Range (0.05–5.00)

Parameter 163 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.3 High Speed Load Comp.

Enter the % value to compensate voltage in relation to load when the motor is running at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the frequency range within which this parameter is active.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–300)

Parameter 161 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

132 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 4.4.4.4 Low Speed Load Comp.

Enter the % value to compensate voltage in relation to load when the motor is running at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the frequency range within which this parameter is active.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–300)

Parameter 160 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.5 Res. Damp Gain

Enter the resonance damping value. Use the parameter and P 4.4.4.6 Res. Damp High Pass Time Constant to help eliminate high
frequency resonance problems. To reduce resonance oscillation, increase the value of P 4.4.4.5 Res. Damp Gain.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 164 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.6 Res. Damp High Pass Time Constant

Set the parameter and P 4.4.4.5 Res. Damp Gain to help eliminate high frequency resonance problems. Enter the time constant that
provides the best dampening.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 165 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.7 Damping Gain

The damping gain stabilizes the PM machine to run the PM machine smooth and stable. The value of Damping gain controls the
dynamic performance of the PM machine. High damping gain gives low dynamic performance and low damping gain give high dynamic
performance. The dynamic performance is related to the machine data and load type. When the damping gain is too high or low the
control becomes unstable.

Default value: 120 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 114 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.8 High Speed Filter Time Const.

This time constant is used above 10% rated speed. Obtain quick control through a short damping time constant. However, if this value is
too short, the control gets unstable.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 133

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 116 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.9 Low Speed Filter Time Const.

This time constant is used above 10% rated speed. Obtain quick control through a short damping time constant. However, if this value is
too short, the control gets unstable.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 115 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.10 Voltage Filter Time Const.

Use this parameter to reduce the influence of high frequency ripple and system resonance in the calculation of supply voltage. Without
this filter, the ripples in the currents can distort the calculated voltage and affect the stability of the system.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 117 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.11 Variable Torque Zero Speed Magnetization

Use this parameter along with P 4.4.4.12 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] to obtain a different magnetizing current on the motor
when running at low speed. Enter a percentage value of the rated magnetizing current. If the setting is too low, the torque on the motor
shaft may be reduced.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–300)

Parameter 150 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Magn. current
e30bk134.10

90%
P 4.4.4.11 Variable Torque
Zero Speed Magnetization

P 4.4.4.12 Min Speed Hz

Normal Magnetizing [Hz]

Figure 71: Motor Magnetization

P 4.4.4.12 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz]

Set the required frequency for normal magnetizing current. Use this parameter along with P 4.4.4.11 Variable Torque Zero Speed
Magnetization.

Default value: 1.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

134 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 152 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.4.13 VT Level

Enter the level of motor magnetization at low speed. Selecting a low value reduces energy loss in the motor but also reduces load
capability.

Default value: 66 Parameter type: Range (40–90)

Parameter 1440 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type is set to options that enable PM motor mode.

P 4.4.4.14 Min. Current at Low Speed

Enter the minimum motor current at low speed. Increasing this current improves motor torque at low speed. The parameter is only
enabled for PM motors.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 166 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.5.3.5 Dead Time Compensation (Menu Index 4.4.4.5)

P 4.4.5.1 Dead Time Compensation Level

Level of applied dead time compensation in percentage. A high level (>90%) optimizes the dynamic motor response, a level from 50–
90% good for both motor-torque ripple minimization and the motor dynamics, a zero level turns off the dead time compensation.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 1407 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.4.5.2 Dead Time Bias Current Level

Set a bias signal (in [%]) to add to the current-sense signal for dead time compensation.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 1409 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 135

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 4.4.5.3 Dead Time Compensation Zero Current Level

Setting this parameter to [1] Enabled at a long motor cable minimizes the motor-torque ripple.

Default value: [0] Disabled Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1464 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled The function is not active.

1 Enabled When a long motor cable is used, select this option to minimize
the motor torque ripple.

P 4.4.5.4 Speed Derate Dead Time Compensation

Dead time compensation level is reduced linearly versus output frequency from the maximum level set by P 4.4.5.1 Dead Time
Compensation Levelto a minimum level set in this parameter.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 1465 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.5.4 Protection (Menu Index 4.6)

P 4.6.1 Warning Freq. High

Use this parameter to set a high limit for the frequency range. When the motor speed is above this limit, warning bit 9 is set in P 5.1.9 Ext.
Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of the control
panel is not turned on when this parameter set limit is reached.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 441 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.6.2 Warning Freq. Low

When the motor speed falls below this limit, warning bit 10 is set in P 5.1.9 Ext. Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can
be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of the control panel is not turned on when this parameter set limit is
reached.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

136 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 440 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.6.3 Warning Current High

Enter the I-high value. When the motor current exceeds this limit, a bit in the drives status word is set. This value can also be
programmed to produce a signal on the digital output or the relay output.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 451 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.6.4 Warning Current Low

Enter the I-low value. When the motor current falls below this limit, a bit in the drives status word is set. This value can also be
programmed to produce a signal on the digital output or the relay output.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 450 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection

Motor thermal protection can be implemented via a PTC sensor in the motor windings connected to 1 of the analog or digital inputs (P
4.6.8 Thermistor Source). Or via calculation (ETR = Electronic Thermal Relay) of the thermal load, based on the actual load and time. The
calculated thermal load is compared with the rated motor current IM,N, and the rated motor frequency fM,N. It is possible to activate an
overheat warning or fault.

Default value: 0 [No Protection] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 190 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Protection Continuously overloaded motor, when no warning or trip of the

frequency converter is required.

1 Thermistor Warning Activates a warning when the connected thermistor in the motor
reacts to a motor overtemperature.

2 Thermistor Trip Stops (trips) the frequency converter when the connected
thermistor in the motor reacts to a motor overtemperature. The
thermistor cut out value must be >3 kΩ. Integrate a thermistor
(PTC sensor) in the motor for winding protection.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 137

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

3 ETR Warning 1 Calculates the load and activates a warning in the display when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning signal via 1 of the
digital outputs.

4 ETR Trip 1 Calculates the load and stops (trips) the frequency converter
when the motor is overloaded. Program a warning signal via 1 of
the digital outputs. The signal appears in the event of a warning
and if the frequency converter trips (thermal warning)

22 ETR Trip - Extended Detection

R
e75ha183.11

(W)

4000

3000

1330

550

250

[°C]

-20°C nominal -5°C nominal +5°C

nominal

Figure 72: PTC Profile

Using a digital input and 10 V as supply: Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor temperature is too high. Parameter
setup:

l Set P 4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip.

l Set P 4.6.8 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 18.
+24 V OUT

+10 V OUT

e30bk176.10
GND

GND
AO1
DIO

OFF
DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

AI1

AI2

12 13 14 15 17 18 20 31 32 33 34 35 ON
<800 Ω >2.9 kΩ R

Figure 73: PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input

138 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Using an analog input and 10 V as supply: Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor temperature is too high. Parameter
setup:

l Set P 4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Thermistor Trip.

l Set P 4.6.8 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 34.
+24 V OUT

+10 V OUT

e30bk177.10
GND

GND
AO1
DIO
DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

AI1

AI2
OFF

12 13 14 15 17 18 20 31 32 33 34 35 ON
<800 Ω >2.9 kΩ R

Figure 74: PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input

Table 63: Threshold Cut Out Values

Input digital/analog Supply voltage Threshold cut out values

Digital 10 V <800 Ω - 2.9 kΩ

Analog 10 V <800 Ω - 2.9 kΩ

NOTICE
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the specification of the used thermistor element.

P 4.6.8 Thermistor Source

Select the input at which the thermistor (PTC sensor) should be connected. When using an analog input, the same analog input cannot
be used for any other purpose such as reference or feedback source.

Default value: 0 [None] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 193 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

3 Digital Input 13

4 Digital Input 14

6 Digital Input 18

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 139

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

NOTICE
Set the digital input to [0] PNP - Active at 24V in Digital Input Mode.

P 4.6.9 Motor External Fan

Select whether an external fan to the motor is required.

Default value: 0 [No] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 191 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No External fan is required and the motor is derated at low speed.

1 Yes Apply an external motor fan (external ventilation), so that

derating of the motor is not required at low speed.

P 4.6.12 Missing Motor Phase Function

Select [1] Trip 10s, to show a fault in the event of a missing motor phase. Select [0] Off, for no missing motor phase fault. The setting [1]
Trip 10 s is recommended to avoid motor damage.

Default value: 1 [Yes] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 458 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off No alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.

1 Trip 10 s An alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.

P 4.6.13 Fault Level

Use this parameter to customize fault levels.

Default value: 3 [Trip Lock] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1490 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

140 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

3 Trip Lock Alarm is set to trip lock.

4 Trip with Delayed Reset Alarm is configured into trip alarm, which can be reset after a
delay time. For example, if Fault 13, Overcurrent is configured
to this option, it can be reset 3 minutes after the alarm. This
option uses the 8th element to control the fault level of Fault 13,
Overcurrent.

5 Fly start At start-up, the frequency converter tries to catch a spinning

motor. If this option is selected, P 5.6.3 Enable Flying Start is
forced to [1] Enabled. This option uses the 8th element to control
the fault level of Fault 13, Overcurrent.

Table 64: Selection of Action when Selected Alarm Appears

Index Alarm Trip lock Trip with delay Fly start

0 Reserved – – –

1 Reserved – – –

2 Reserved – – –

3 Reserved – – –

4 Reserved – – –

5 Reserved – – –

6 Reserved – – –

7 Overcurrent D X X

D indicates Default Setting and X indicates Possible Selection.

P 4.6.14 Sync. Locked Rotor Protection

Locked rotor detection for PM motor.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 3022 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off The function is not active.

1 On The locked rotor protection for PM motors.

P 4.6.15 Sync. Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]

Locked rotor detection time for PM motor.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 141

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0.10 Parameter type: Range (0.05–1.0)

Parameter 3023 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

7.6 Application (Menu Index 5)

7.6.1 Status (Menu Index 5.1)
P 5.1.1 Fault Word 1

Use this parameter to view fault word 1 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1690 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.2 Fault Word 2

Use this parameter to view fault word 2 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1691 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.3 Fault Word 3

Use this parameter to view fault word 3 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1697 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.4 Warning Word 1

Use this parameter to view warning word 1 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1692 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.5 Warning Word 2

Use this parameter to view warning word 2 in hex code.

142 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1693 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.6 Warning Word 3

Use this parameter to view warning word 3 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1698 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.7 Active Control Word

Use this parameter to view the control word sent from the frequency converter in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1600 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.8 Drive Status Word

Use this parameter to view the status word sent from the frequency converter via bus.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1603 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.9 Ext. Status Word

Use this parameter to view the extended status word in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1694 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.10 Ext. Status Word 2

Use this parameter to view the extended status word 2 in hex code.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 143

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1695 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.16 Reference [Unit]

Use this parameter to view the present value of reference applied in the frequency converter resulting from the choice of configuration
in P 5.4.2 Operation Mode.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 1601 Unit: ReferenceFeedbackUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 5.1.17 Reference [%]

Use this parameter to view the total reference.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Parameter 1602 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.18 External Reference

Use this parameter to view the sum of all external reference sources defined in P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source, P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2
Source, and P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Parameter 1650 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.19 Main Actual Value [%]

Use this parameter to view the Main Actual Value sent from the frequency converter via bus.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (-200.00–200.00)

Parameter 1605 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.26 FC Port CTW 1

Use this parameter to view the 2 byte control word (CTW) received from the bus master.

Default value: 1084 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

144 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1685 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 5.1.27 FC Port REF 1

Use this parameter to view the last received reference from the FC port.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-32768–32767)

Parameter 1686 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

7.6.2 Protection (Menu Index 5.2)

P 5.2.1 Warning Reference High

Use this parameter to set the high limit for the reference range. When the actual reference exceeds this limit, warning bit 19 is set in P
5.1.9 Ext. Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of
the control panel is not turned on when this limit is reached.

Default value: 4999.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 455 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.2.2 Warning Reference Low

Use this parameter to set the low limit for the reference range. When the actual reference exceeds this limit, warning bit 20 is set in P
5.1.9 Ext. Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of
the control panel is not turned on when this limit is reached.

Default value: -4999.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 454 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.2.3 Warning Feedback High

Use this parameter to set the high limit for the feedback range. When the feedback exceeds this limit, warning bit 5 is set in P 5.1.9
Ext.Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of the
control panel is not turned on when this limit is reached.

Default value: 4999.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 457 Unit: ProcessCtrlUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 145

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.2.4 Warning Feedback Low

Use this parameter to set the low limit for the feedback range. When the feedback exceeds this limit, warning bit 6 is set in P 5.1.9
Ext.Status Word. The output relay or the digital output can be configured to indicate this warning. The warning indicator light of the
control panel is not turned on when this limit is reached.

Default value: -4999.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 456 Unit: ProcessCtrlUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.2.9 Lost Load Function

Select an action if lost load is detected.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 2260 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off The function is not active.

1 Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but activates a

warning. A frequency converter digital output or a serial
communication bus communicates a warning to other
equipment.

2 Trip The frequency converter stop running and activates a fault. A

frequency converter digital output or a serial communication bus
communicates a fault to other equipment.

P 5.2.10 Lost Load Detection Torque Level

Set the minimum allowed torque level in percent to motor nominal torque. The lost load detection can be activated below this level.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (5–100)

Parameter 2261 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.2.11 Lost Load Detection Delay

Set the minimum duration that the torque has to be below detection limit before activating the lost load exception.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–600)

146 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 2262 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.2.16 Watchdog Response

Use this parameter to select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when the control word fails to be updated within the
time period specified in P 5.2.17 Watchdog Delay.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 804 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 Freeze Output

2 Stop

3 Jogging

4 Max. Speed

5 Stop and Trip

6 Qstop and Trip

7 Select Setup 1

8 Select Setup 2

26 Trip

P 5.2.17 Watchdog Delay

Use this parameter to enter the maximum time expected to pass between the reception of 2 consecutive telegrams. If this time is
exceeded, it indicates that the serial communication has stopped, and the function selected in P 5.2.16 Watchdog Response is then
carried out.

Default value: 1.0 Parameter type: Range (0.5–6000.0)

Parameter 803 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 147

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.6.3 Operation Mode (Menu Index 5.4)

P 5.4.1 Application Selection

Use this parameter to select integrated application functions. When an application is selected, a set of its related parameters is set
automatically.

Default value: 20 [Speed Control Mode] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 16 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

20 Speed Control Mode

21 Process Control Mode

22 Multi Speed Control Mode

23 Three Wire Control Mode

24 Torque Control Mode

P 5.4.2 Operation Mode

Use this parameter to select the application control principle to be used.

Default value: 0 [Speed Open Loop] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 100 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Speed Open Loop Enable speed control (without feedback signal from motor)
with automatic slip compensation for almost constant speed at
varying loads. Compensations are active and can be disabled.

3 Process Closed Loop Enable the use of process control in the frequency converter.

4 Torque Open Loop Enable the use of torque open loop in the frequency converter

P 5.4.3 Motor Control Principle

Use this parameter to select U/f mode or VVC+ mode as motor control principle.

Default value: 1 [VVC+] Parameter type: Selection

148 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 101 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 U/f When running U/f, control slip and load compensations are not
included. The control is used for parallel-connected motors and/
or special motor applications

1 VVC+ Normal running mode, including slip and load compensations.

NOTICE
When P 4.2.1.1 Motor Type is set to PM enabled options, only VVC+ option is available.

7.6.4 Control (Menu Index 5.5)

7.6.4.1 General Settings (Menu Index 5.5.1)
P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection

Use this parameter to select the control place of the unit.

Default value: 0 [Digital and Ctrl. word] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 801 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital and Ctrl. word Use both the digital input and the control word.

1 Digital only Use the digital input only.

2 Control word only Use the control word only.

P 5.5.1.2 Control Source

Use this parameter to select the source of the control word.

Default value: 1 [FC Port] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 802 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 149

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 FC Port

P 5.5.1.6 Configurable Status Word STW

Use this parameter to configure status word bits. Bits 5 and 12–15 of the STW are configurable for various Drive status signals.

Default value: 1 [Profile Default] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 813 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Profile default

10 T13 DI status

11 T14 DI status

12 T15 DI status

13 T17 DI status

15 T18 DI status

21 Thermal warning

30 Brake fault (IGBT)

40 Out of reference range

54 Running

59 On reference

P 5.5.1.7 Configurable Control Word CTW

Use this parameter to configure control word bits. The control word has 16 bits (0–15). Bits 10 and 12–15 are configurable.

Default value: 1 [Profile Default] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 814 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

150 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 Profile default

2 CTW valid, active low

P 5.5.1.10 Operating State at Power-up

Select operating mode for restart upon reconnection of the drive to mains voltage after power down. This function is active in Local
mode only.

Default value: 1 [Forced stop, ref = old] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 4 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Resume Restart the frequency converter, maintaining the start or stop

settings using START or STOP button, selected before power-
down of the frequency converter.

1 Forced Stop, Ref.=old Restart the frequency converter with a saved local reference after
mains voltage reappears, after pressing START.

2 Forced Stop, Ref.=0 Reset the local reference to 0 upon restarting the frequency
converter.

P 5.5.1.15 [REM/LOC] Button

Use this parameter to select the function of the REM/LOC button. To avoid accidental LOC/REM change of the drive, select [0] Disabled.
The setting can be locked by P 6.6.20 Password.

Default value: 1 [Enabled] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 46 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

P 5.5.1.16 [Stop/Reset] Button

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 151

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Use this parameter to select the function of the Stop/Reset button. To avoid accidental stop or reset of the drive from control panel, select
[0] Disabled. The setting can be locked by P 6.6.20 Password.

Default value: 1 [Enabled] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 44 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

7 Reset Only Enabled

7.6.4.2 Digital/Bus (Menu Index 5.5.2)

P 5.5.2.1 Coasting Select

Use this parameter to select whether the coasting function is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 850 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input Activate the coasting command via a digital input

1 Bus Activate the coasting command via the serial communication

port or fieldbus option.

2 Logic AND Activate the coasting command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port and 1 extra digital input.

3 Logic OR Activate the coasting command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port or via 1 of the digital inputs.

P 5.5.2.2 Quick Stop Select

Use this parameter to select whether the Quick Stop function is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.

152 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 851 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input Activate the quick stop command via a digital input.

1 Bus Activate the quick stop command via the serial communication
port or fieldbus option.

2 Logic AND Activate the quick stop command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port and also via 1 of the digital inputs.

3 Logic OR Activate the quick stop command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port or via 1 of the digital inputs.

P 5.5.2.3 DC Brake Select

Use this parameter to select whether the DC brake is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 852 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input Activate the DC brake command via a digital input.

1 Bus Activate the DC brake command via the serial communication

port or fieldbus option.

2 Logic AND Activate the DC brake command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port and additionally via 1 of the digital inputs.

3 Logic OR Activate the DC brake command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port or via 1 of the digital inputs.

P 5.5.2.4 Start Select

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 153

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Use this parameter to select whether the drive start function is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This
parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 853 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input A digital input triggers the start function.

1 Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus triggers the start

function.

2 Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a digital input

trigger the start function.

3 Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a digital input triggers

the start function.

P 5.5.2.5 Reversing Select

Use this parameter to select whether the drive reverse function is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 854 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input A digital input triggers the reversing function.

1 Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus triggers the

reversing function.

2 Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a digital input

trigger the reversing function.

3 Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a digital input triggers

the reversing function.

P 5.5.2.6 Set-up Select

154 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Use this parameter to select whether the drive setup selection is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 855 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input A digital input triggers the setup selection.

1 Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus triggers the setup

selection.

2 Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a digital input

trigger the setup selection.

3 Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a digital input triggers

the setup selection.

P 5.5.2.7 Preset Reference Select

Use this parameter to select whether the drive Preset Reference selection is controlled via the terminals (digital input) and/or via the
fieldbus.

NOTICE
This parameter is active only when P 5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection is set to [0] Digital and control word.

Default value: 3 [Logic OR] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 856 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Digital input A digital input triggers the preset reference selection.

1 Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus triggers the preset

reference selection.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 155

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

2 Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a digital input

trigger the preset reference selection.

3 Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a digital input triggers

the preset reference selection.

7.6.4.3 Reference (Menu Index 5.5.3)

P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range

Use this parameter to select the range of the reference signal and the feedback signal.

Default value: 0 [Min–Max] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 300 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Min–Max Select the range of the reference signal and the feedback signal.
Signal values can be positive only, or positive and negative.

1 -Max–Max For both positive and negative values (both directions), relative
to P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction.

P 5.5.3.2 Reference/Feedback Unit

Use this parameter to select the unit to be used in Process PID Control references and feedback.

Default value: 3 [Hz] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 301 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 %

2 RPM

3 Hz

4 Nm

5 PPM

156 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

10 l/min

12 Pulse/s

20 l/s

21 l/min

22 l/h

23 m³/s

24 m³/min

25 m³/h

30 kg/s

31 kg/min

32 kg/h

33 t/min

34 t/h

40 m/s

41 m/min

45 m

60 °C

70 mbar

71 bar

72 Pa

73 kPa

74 m WG

80 kW

120 GPM

121 gal/s

122 gal/min

123 gal/h

124 CFM

125 ft³/s

126 ft³/min

127 ft³/h

130 lb/s

131 lb/min

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 157

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

132 lb/h

140 ft/s

141 ft/min

145 ft

150 lb ft

160 °F

170 psi

171 lb/in²

172 in WG

173 ft WG

180 HP

P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum

Use this parameter to set the maximum reference. The maximum reference is the highest value obtainable by summing all references.
The maximum reference unit matches the configuration inP 5.4.2 Configuration Mode.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 303 Unit: Reference Feedback Unit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum

Use this parameter to set the minimum reference. The minimum reference is the lowest value obtainable by summing all references.
Minimum reference is active only when P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range is set to [0] Min.- Max. The minimum reference unit matches the choice
of configuration in P 5.4.2 Configuration Mode.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 302 Unit: Reference Feedback Unit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.3.5 Reference Function

Use this parameter to select which reference source to use. To sum both external and preset reference sources, select [0] Sum. To use
either the preset or the external reference source, select [1] External/Preset.

Default value: 0 [Sum] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 304 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

158 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Sum Sum both external and preset reference sources.

1 External/Preset Use either the preset or the external reference source. Shift
between external and preset via a command or a digital input.

P 5.5.3.6 Reference Site

Use this parameter to select which reference site to activate. To use the local reference in Local mode, or the remote reference in
Remote mode, select [0] Linked to Loc / Rem. To use the same reference in both Remote and Local modes, select [1] Remote or [2] Local
respectively.

Default value: 0 [Linked to Loc/Rem] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 313 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Linked to Loc/Rem

1 Remote

2 Local

P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source

Use this parameter to select the input for the 1st reference signal. The parameters P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source, P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2
Source, and P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source define up to 3 different reference signals. The sum of these reference signals defines the actual
reference.

Default value: 1 [Analog Input 33] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 315 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

8 Frequency Input 18

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 159

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

11 Local bus reference

21 Potentiometer

P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source

Use this parameter to select the input for the 2nd reference signal. The parameters P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source, P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2
Source, and P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source define up to 3 different reference signals. The sum of these reference signals defines the actual
reference.

Default value: 2 [Analog Input 34] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 316 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

8 Frequency Input 18

11 Local Bus reference

21 Potentiometer

P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source

Use this parameter to select the input for the 3rd reference signal. P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source, P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source, andP 5.5.3.9
Reference 3 Source define up to 3 different reference signals. The sum of these reference signals defines the actual reference.

Default value: 11 [Local bus reference] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 317 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

8 Frequency Input 18

160 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

11 Local bus reference

21 Potentiometer

P 5.5.3.10 Preset Reference

Use this parameter, an array [8], to define preset references. Enter up to 8 different preset references. To activate a preset reference, use
digital input and select from [16] Preset reference bit 0, [17] Preset reference bit 1, or [18] Preset reference bit 2, in the corresponding
parameter in parameter group P 9.4.1 Digital Input.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (-100.00–100.00)

Parameter 310 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.3.11 Preset Relative Reference

Use this parameter, an array [8], to define a fixed value to be added to the variable value defined in P 5.5.3.12 Relative Scaling Reference
Resource. Their sum is multiplied by the actual reference. This product is then added to the actual reference to give the resulting actual
reference.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (-100.00–100.00)

Parameter 314 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

e30ba059.13

Y
Relative Z Resulting
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference

Figure 75: Preset Relative Reference

e30bk135.10

0
/1 0
X*Y
X+

Y
-100 0 100 %
P 5.5.3.11 Preset
Relative Reference

Figure 76: Actual Reference

P 5.5.3.12 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

Use this parameter to define a variable value to be added to the fixed value defined in P 5.5.3.11 Preset Relative Reference. Their sum is
multiplied by the actual reference. This product is then added to the actual reference to give the resulting actual reference.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 161

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 318 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

8 Frequency Input 18

11 Local bus reference

21 Potentiometer

P 5.5.3.13 Freeze Up/Down Step Delta

Use this parameter to enter a percentage value (relative) to be either added to or deducted from the actual reference for catch up or slow
down respectively.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–100.00)

Parameter 312 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.3.20 Enable Potentiometer

Use this parameter to enable or disable the potentiometer. The setting can be locked with P 6.6.20 Password.

Default value: 0 [Disabled] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 45 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

7.6.4.4 Ramp (Menu Index 5.5.4)

P 5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selector

162 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Use this parameter to select the ramp type, depending on requirements for acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp provides
constant acceleration during ramping. Sine Ramp and Sine 2 Ramp provide non-linear acceleration.

Default value: 0 [Linear] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 340 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Linear

1 Sine Ramp

2 Sine 2 Ramp Only be used with speed control mode) S-ramp based on the
values set in P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.3 Ramp 1
Decel. Time.

P 5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time

Use this parameter to enter acceleration time. The values range from 0 Hz to the motor frequency defined in P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency. Select a ramp up time such that the output current does not exceed the current limit in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit % during
ramping.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 341 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.4.3 Ramp 1 Decel. Time

Use this parameter to enter the deceleration time. The values range from the motor frequency defined in P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency to
0 Hz. Select a ramp down time such that no overvoltage occurs in the inverter due to regenerative operation of the motor, and such that
the generated current does not exceed the current limit set in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 342 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.4.8 Ramp 2 Type Selector

Use this parameter to select the ramp type, depending on requirements for acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp provides
constant acceleration during ramping. Sine Ramp and Sine 2 Ramp provide non-linear acceleration.

Default value: 0 [Linear] Parameter type: Selection

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 163

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 350 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Linear

1 Sine Ramp

2 Sine 2 Ramp (Only to be used with speed control mode) S-ramp based on the
values set in P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2
Decel. Time.

P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time

Use this parameter to enter acceleration time. The values range from 0 Hz to the motor frequency defined in P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency. Select a ramp-up time such that the output current does not exceed the current limit in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit % during
ramping.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 351 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time

Use this parameter to enter the deceleration time. The values range from the motor frequency defined in P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency to
0 Hz. Select a ramp-down time such that no overvoltage occurs in the inverter due to regenerative operation of the motor, and such that
the generated current does not exceed the current limit set in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 352 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.5 Start Settings (Menu Index 5.6)

P 5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time

Use this parameter to define a delay of the starting time. The frequency converter begins with the start function selected in P 5.6.2 Start
Function. Set the start delay time until acceleration is to begin.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–25.5)

Parameter 171 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

164 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.6.2 Start Function

Use this parameter to select the start function during start delay, in case a non-zero value is set in P 5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time.

Default value: 2 [Coast/delay time] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 172 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 DC Hold/delay time Energize motor with a DC hold current (P 5.7.6 DC Hold Current
%) during the start delay time.

1 DC-Brake/delay time Energize motor with a DC break current (P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current
%) during the start delay time.

2 Coast/delay time Motor coasted during the start delay time (inverter off ).

3 Start speed clockwise Only possible with VVC+. Regardless of the value applied by
the reference signal, the output speed applies the setting of the
start speed in P 5.6.4 Start Speed [Hz] and the output current
corresponds to the setting of the start current in P 5.6.5 Start
Current. This function is typically used in hoisting applications
without counterweight and especially in applications with a
cone-motor, where the start is clockwise, followed by rotation in
the reference direction.

4 Horizontal operation Only possible with VVC+. For obtaining the function described
in P 5.6.4 Start Speed [Hz] and P 5.6.5 Start Current during the
start delay time. The motor rotates in the reference direction. If
the reference signal equals 0, P 5.6.4 Start Speed [Hz] is ignored
and the output speed equals 0. The output current corresponds
to the setting of the start current in P 5.6.5 Start Current.

5 VVC+ clockwise The start current is calculated automatically. This function uses
the start speed in the start delay time only.

P 5.6.3 Enable Flying Start

Use this parameter to control the flying start function. This function makes it possible to catch a motor which is spinning freely due to a
mains dropout.

Default value: 0 [Disabled] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 173 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 165

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled No function.

1 Enabled Enable the frequency converter to catch and control a spinning

motor. When P 5.6.3 Enable Flying Start is enabled, P 5.6.1 Start
Zero Speed Time, and P 5.6.2 Start Function have no function.

2 Enabled Always Enable flying start at every start command.

3 Enabled Reference Direction Enable the frequency converter to catch and control a spinning
motor. The search is performed only in the reference direction.

4 Enabled Always Reference Direction Enable flying start at every start command. The search is
performed only in the reference direction.

P 5.6.4 Start Speed [Hz]

Use this parameter to set the motor start speed. After the start signal the output speed leaps to the set value. This parameter can be used
for vertical movement applications (such as cone rotor). Set the start function in P 5.6.2 Start Function to [3] Start Speed Clockwise, [4]
Horizontal Operation, or [5] VVC+ Clockwise, and set a start delay time in P 5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.0–500.0)

Parameter 175 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.5 Start Current

Use this parameter to set the boost current for the motor. Some motors, for example cone-rotor motors, need extra current or starting
speed to disengage the rotor. To obtain this boost, set the required current in P 5.6.5 Start Current. Set the start speed with P 5.6.4 Start
Speed [Hz]. Set parameter P 5.6.2 Start Function to [3] Start Speed Clockwise or [4] Horizontal Operation, and set a start delay time in P
5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.00–1000.00)

Parameter 176 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.6 Breakaway Current Boost

Use this parameter to set the breakaway current boost. The frequency converter provides higher current than normal current levels to
enhance breakaway-torque capacity.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 422 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

166 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 On

P 5.6.7 Start Max Speed [Hz]

Use this parameter to enable high starting torque. The time from the moment the start signal is given, until the speed exceeds the speed
set in this parameter, becomes a start zone. In the start zone, the current limit and motor torque limit are set to the maximum possible
value for the frequency converter-motor combination. Setting the parameter value to zero disables the function.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–500.00)

Parameter 178 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.8 Start Max Time to Trip

Use this parameter to define the maximum start time. The time from the moment the start signal is given until the speed exceeds the
speed set in 5.6.7 Start Max Speed [Hz] must not exceed the time set in this parameter. Otherwise, the frequency converter stops with
fault 18, Start Failed.

Default value: 5.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–10.0)

Parameter 179 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.11 Sync. Motor Start Mode

Use this parameter to select the motor start-up mode. This is done to initialize the VVC+ control core for a previously free-running motor.
This parameter is active for motors in VVC+ only if the motor is stopped (or running at low speed).

Default value: 0 [Rotor Detection] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 170 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 167

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Rotor Detection Estimates the electrical angle of the rotor and uses that as a
starting point. This is the standard selection for automation drive
applications. If flying start detects that the motor is running at
low speed or is stopped, the drive can detect the rotor position
(the angle), and start the motor from there.

1 Parking The Parking function applies DC current across the stator

winding and rotates the rotor to electrical zero position. This
selection is typically selected for pump and fan applications. If
flying start detects that the motor is running at low speed or is
stopped, the drive sends out a DC current to make the motor
park at an angle and then start the motor from.

3 Rotor Last Position This option takes the advantage of the last position of rotor at
stop and gives a quick start. It is only used in the situation of
controlled stop, the drive records the last position of rotor at stop
and starts the motor directly without rotor detection and angle
calculation. When in the situation of non-controlled stop and
power cycle, the drive needs to detect the rotor position. This
option can be used for fast restart application. Start may fail if the
rotor position has been changed.

P 5.6.12 Sync. Motor Detection Current %

Use this parameter to adjust the amplitude of the test pulse during position detection at start. Adjust this parameter to improve the
position measurement.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 146 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.13 Sync. Motor Parking Time

Use this parameter to set the duration of the Parking Current set in P 5.6.14 Sync. Motor Parking Current %, once activated.

Default value: 3.0 Parameter type: Range (0.1–60.0)

Parameter 207 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.14 Sync. Motor Parking Current %

Use this parameter to set current as percentage of the rated motor current, set with P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current. Is used when [1] Parking is
selected in P 5.6.11 Sync. Motor Start Mode.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–150)

Parameter 206 Unit: %

number:

168 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.15 Sync. High Starting Torque Time [s]

Use this parameter to set the high starting torque time for a PM motor in VVC+ mode.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.00–60.00)

Parameter 3020 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.6.16 Sync. High Starting Torque Current [%]

Use this parameter to set the high starting torque current for a PM Motor in VVC+ mode.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.0–200.0)

Parameter 3021 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint 32 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.6 Stop Settings (Menu Index 5.7)

P 5.7.1 Function at Stop

Use this parameter to select the drive function after a stop command or after the speed is ramped down to the level set in P 5.7.2 Min
Speed for Function at Stop [Hz].

Default value: 0 [Coast] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 180 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Coast Leaves the motor in free mode

1 DC Hold/Motor Preheat Energizes the motor with a DC-hold current (see P 5.7.6 DC Hold
Current %).

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 169

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

3 Pre-magnetizing Builds up a magnetic field while the motor is stopped. This allows
the motor to produce torque quickly at commands (induction
motors only). This premagnetizing function does not help the 1st
start command.
Two different solutions are available to pre-magnetize the
machine for the 1st start command:
Solution 1:
• 1. Start the frequency converter with a 0 RPM reference.
• 2. Wait 2–4 rotor time constants (see the formula below)
before increasing the speed reference.
Solution 2:
• 1. Set P 5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time to the premagnetize time
(2–4 rotor time constants).
• 2. Set P 5.6.2 Start Function to [0] DC hold.
• 3. Set the DC hold current magnitude (P 5.7.6 DC Hold Current
% to be equal to Ipre-mag = Unom/(1.73 x Xh).
Sample rotor time constants = (Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr) 1 kW
= 0.2 s 10 kW = 0.5 s 100 kW = 1.7 s).

10 Coast With Stop at Low Reference When a stop command is given, or a start command is removed,
and the reference is below P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop
[Hz], the motor is disconnected from the drive.

11 DC Hold With Stop at Low Reference When a stop command is given, or a start command is removed,
and the reference is below P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop
[Hz], energizes the motor with a DC-hold current (see P 5.7.6 DC
Hold Current %).

P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]

Use this parameter to set the output frequency at which to activate P 5.7.1 Function at Stop.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 182 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time

Set the duration of the DC brake current set in P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current %, once activated.

Default value: 10.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–60.0)

Parameter 202 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

170 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current %

Use this parameter to enter a value for current as a percentage of the rated motor current. See P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current. When the
speed is lower than the limit set in P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency, or when the DC-brake Inverse function is active, (in parameter group
9.4.1. Digital Inputs set to [5] DC-brake Inverse; or via the serial port), a DC-brake current is applied on a stop command. See P 5.7.3 DC
Brake Time for duration.

Default value: 50 Parameter type: Range (0–150)

Parameter 201 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current. To avoid motor damage caused by overheating, do not run at 100% for
too long.

P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency

Use this parameter to set the DC-brake cut in speed for activation of the DC-brake current set in P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current, together with a
stop command.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 204 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.7.6 DC Hold Current %

Use this parameter to set the holding current as a percentage of the rated motor current, see P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current). The parameter
holds the motor function (holding torque) or preheats the motor. This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in P 5.6.2 Start Function
as [0] DC Hold/Delay Time or P 5.7.1 Function at Stop as [1] DC Hold / Motor Preheat.

Default value: 50 Parameter type: Range (0–160)

Parameter 200 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current. Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the motor.

P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time

Use this parameter to enter the quick-stop ramp-down time, which is the deceleration time from the nominal motor speed to 0 Hz.
Ensure that no resulting overvoltage occurs in the inverter due to regenerative operation of the motor required to achieve the given
ramp-down time. Ensure also that the generated current required to achieve the given ramp-down time does not exceed the current
limit (set in P 2.7.1 Current Limit). Activate quick stop with a signal on a selected digital input, or via the serial communication port.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 171

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 381 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.7 Speed Control (Menu Index 5.8)

P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction

Use this parameter to select the motor speed directions required. Use this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.

Default value: 2 [Both directions] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 410 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Clockwise Only operation in clockwise direction is allowed.

2 Both directions Operation in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions are

allowed.

P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Use this parameter to enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The parameter can be set to match the maximum motor speed
recommended by the manufacturer. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the value in P 5.8.3 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]. The
output frequency must not exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency.

Default value: 65.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 414 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.8.3 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Use this parameter to enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The motor speed low limit can be set to correspond to the minimum
output frequency of the motor shaft. The motor speed low limit must not exceed P 5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 412 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

172 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.8.8 Torque Limit Mode Speed Ctrl

Use this parameter to select an analog input for scaling the settings in P 5.10.1 Torque Limit Motor Mode and P 5.10.2 Torque Limit
Generator Mode 0–100% (or inverse). The signal levels corresponding to 0% and 100% are defined in the analog input scaling. This
parameter is only active when P 5.4.2 Configuration Mode is in speed mode.

Default value: 0 [No Function] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 420 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

2 Analog in 33

4 Analog in 33 inverted

6 Analog in 34

8 Analog in 34 inverted

P 5.8.11 Band, High Limit

Some systems call for avoiding certain output speeds due to resonance problems in the system. Use this parameter, an array [4], to enter
the upper limits of the speeds to be avoided.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 463 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.8.12 Band, Low Limit

Some systems call for avoiding certain output speeds due to resonance problems in the system. Use this parameter, an array [4], to enter
the lower limits of the speeds to be avoided.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 461 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 173

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.6.8 Inching (Menu Index 5.9)

P 5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time

Use this parameter to enter the jog ramp time, which is the acceleration/deceleration time between 0 Hz and the rated motor frequency
P 4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency. Ensure that the resulting output current required for the given jog ramp time does not exceed the current
limit in P 2.7.1 Current Limit.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.01–3600.00)

Parameter 380 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

Hz
e30bk136.10

P 5.8.2 Motor Speed

High Limit[Hz]
P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency

P 5.9.2 Jog
Reference
P 5.8.3 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz]
t jog t jog Time
P 5.9.1 Jog P 5.9.1 Jog
Ramp Time Ramp Time
(acc) (dec)

Figure 77: Jog Ramp Time

P 5.9.2 Jog Reference

Use this parameter to set the jog speed. The jog speed is a fixed output speed at which the frequency converter is running when the jog
function is activated.

Default value: 5.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–500.0)

Parameter 311 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.9 Torque Control (Menu Index 5.10)

P 5.10.1 Motor Torque Limit

Use this parameter to enter the maximum torque limit for motor operation. This function limits the torque on the shaft to protect the
mechanical installation.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 416 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

174 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.10.2 Regenerative Torque Limit

Use this parameter to enter the maximum torque limit for generator mode operation. This function limits the torque on the shaft to
protect the mechanical installation.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (Size Related)

Parameter 417 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.10.3 Speed Limit Mode Torque Ctrl.

Use this parameter to select an analog input for scaling the settings in P 2.3.14 Max Output Frequency 0–100% (or inverse). The signal
levels corresponding to 0% and 100% are defined in the analog input scaling. This parameter is only active when P 5.4.2 Operation Mode
is in torque mode.

Default value: 0 [No function] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 421 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

2 Analog in 33

4 Analog in 33 inverted

6 Analog in 34

8 Analog in 34 inverted

P 5.10.4 Torque PID Proportional Gain

Use this parameter to enter the proportional gain value for the torque controller. Selection of a high value makes the controller react
faster. Too high a setting leads to controller instability.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 712 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.10.5 Torque PID Integration Time

Use this parameter to enter the integration time for the torque controller. Selection of a low value makes the controller react faster. Too
low a setting leads to control instability.

Default value: 0.020 Parameter type: Range (0.002–2.000)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 175

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 713 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.10.6 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

Use this parameter to define the delay for tripping the torque warning. When the output torque reaches the torque limit, a warning is
triggered. If the torque limit warning is continuously present for the period specified in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
disable the feature, enter the value of 60 s.

Default value: 60 Parameter type: Range (0–60)

Parameter 1425 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.10 Mechanical Brake Control (Menu Index 5.11)

P 5.11.1 Brake Closing Speed

Use this parameter to set the motor frequency when the mechanical brake activates, when a stop condition is present.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–400.0)

Parameter 222 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.11.2 Brake Close Time

Use this parameter to enter the brake delay time for the coast after ramp-down time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full holding
torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake has locked the load before the motor enters coast mode.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (0.0–5.0)

Parameter 223 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.11.3 Release Brake Current

Use this parameter to set the motor current for release of the mechanical brake, when a start condition is present. The upper limit is
specified with P 2.1.5 Inv. Max. Current.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–100.00)

Parameter 220 Unit: A

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

176 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

NOTICE
When mechanical brake control output is selected, but no mechanical brake is connected, the function does not work by default
setting due to too low motor current.

P 5.11.4 Mech. Brake w/ dir. Change

Use this parameter to select whether to use the mechanical brake in direction changes. Select [1] On if the mechanical brake must
engage when the shaft changes direction. The speed at which the mechanical brake engages is selected in P 5.11.1 Brake Closing Speed.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 239 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections of the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 On

2 On with start delay

7.6.11 Process Control (Menu Index 5.12)

7.6.11.1 Status (Menu Index 5.12.1)
P 5.12.1.1 Process PID Error

This parameter shows the error value in the process PID controller.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Parameter 1890 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.12.1.2 Process PID Output

This parameter shows the raw output value from the process PID controller.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Parameter 1891 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.12.1.3 Process PID Clamped Output

This parameter shows the output value from the process PID controller after reaching a clamp limit.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 177

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 1892 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.12.1.4 Process PID Gain Scaled Output

This parameter shows the output value from the process PID controller after reaching a clamp limit and scaling the resulting value with
consideration to the gain.

Default value: 0.0 Parameter type: Range (-200.0–200.0)

Parameter 1893 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 5.12.1.5 Feedback Value

Use this parameter to view the feedback resulting from the selection of scaling in P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range, P 5.5.3.3 Reference
Maximum, and P 5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 1652 Unit: Process Ctrl Unit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

7.6.11.2 Feedback (Menu Index 5.12.4)

P 5.12.4.1 Feedback 1 Resource

Use this parameter to select which drive input is treated as the feedback source.

Default value: 0 [No function] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 720 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

4 Frequency Input 18

P 5.12.4.2 Feedback 2 Resource

Use this parameter to select which drive input is treated as the source of the feedback.

178 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 [No function] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 722 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 No function

1 Analog Input 33

2 Analog Input 34

4 Frequency Input 18

P 5.12.4.3 Feedback 1 Conversion

Use this parameter to select a conversion for the Feedback 1 signal. To leave the feedback signal unchanged, select [0] Linear.

Default value: 0 [Linear] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 760 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 Linear

1 Square root

P 5.12.4.4 Feedback 2 Conversion

Use this parameter to select a conversion for the Feedback 2 signal. To leave the feedback signal unchanged, select [0] Linear.

Default value: 0 [Linear] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 762 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 Linear

1 Square root

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 179

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.6.11.3 PID Controller (Menu Index 5.12.5)

P 5.12.5.1 PID Proportional Gain

Use this parameter to enter the process controller proportional gain. Quick control is obtained at high amplification. However, if
amplification is too great, the process may become unstable.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.0–10.00)

Parameter 733 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.5.1 PID Proportional Gain

Use this parameter to enter the process controller integral time. Obtain quick control through a short integral time, though if the integral
time is too short, the process becomes unstable. An excessively long integral time disables the integral action.

Default value: 9999.00 Parameter type: Range (0.10–9999.00)

Parameter 734 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.5.4 Antiwindup Enabled

Use this parameter to control error regulation. To continue regulation of an error even when the output frequency cannot be increased
or decreased, select [0] Off. To cease regulation of an error when the output frequency can no longer be adjusted, select [1] On.

Default value: 1 [On] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 731 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 On

P 5.12.5.5 PID Differentiation Time

Use this parameter to enter the process controller differentiation time. The differentiator does not react to constant error. It provides gain
proportional to the rate of change of the process feedback. Setting this parameter to zero disables the differentiator.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 735 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

180 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 5.12.5.6 PID Diff. Gain Limit

Use this parameter to enter a limit for the differentiator gain. If there is no limit, the differentiator gain increases when there are fast
changes. To obtain a pure differentiator gain at slow changes and a constant differentiator gain where fast changes occur, limit the
differentiator gain.

Default value: 5.0 Parameter type: Range (1.0–50.0)

Parameter 736 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.5.7 PID Normal/Inverse Control

Use this parameter to select output speed change during errors. To set the process control to increase the output speed when the
process error is positive, select [0] Normal. To reduce the output speed when the process error is positive, select [1] Inverse.

Default value: 0 [Normal] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 730 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 Normal

1 Inverse

P 5.12.5.8 PID Start Speed

Use this parameter to enter the motor speed to be attained as a start signal for starting PID control. Upon power-up, the drive operates
using speed open loop control. When the Process PID start speed is reached, the drive changes to PID control.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–6000)

Parameter 732 Unit: RPM

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.5.9 On Reference Bandwidth

Use this parameter to enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the PI Control Error (the difference between the reference and the
feedback) is greater than the value of this parameter, then the On Reference status bit is set to 0.

Default value: 5 Parameter type: Range (0–200)

Parameter 739 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 181

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.6.11.4 Feed Forward (Menu Index 5.12.6)

P 5.12.6.1 PID Feed Forward Factor

Use this parameter to enter the PID feed forward factor. The feed forward factor sends a constant fraction of the reference signal
to bypass PID control, so the PID only has an effect on the remaining fraction of the control signal. This function increases dynamic
performance.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–200)

Parameter 738 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.11.5 Sleep Mode (Menu Index 5.12.7)

The sequence when running sleep mode in open loop ([1] Speed is selected in P 5.12.7.1 Sleep Mode in Process Closed-
loop Mode)
1. The motor speed is less than P 5.12.7.8 Sleep Speed [Hz] and the motor has been running longer than P 5.12.7.2 Minimum Run Time.
2. The drive ramps the motor speed down to P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz].
3. The drive activates P 5.7.1 Function at Stop. The drive is now in sleep mode.
4. The drive compares the speed setpoint with P 5.12.7.4 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] to detect wake-up situation.
5. The speed setpoint is greater than P 5.12.7.4 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] and the sleep condition has lasted for more than P 5.12.7.3
Minimum Sleep Time. The drive is now out of sleep mode.
6. Go back to speed open loop control (ramp motor speed up to the speed setpoint).

The sequence when running sleep mode in closed loop ([0] Feed. and Speed is selected in P 5.12.7.1 Sleep Mode in
Process Closed-loop Mode)
1. When the error between reference and feedback is greater than P 5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Difference, and the output
speed is less than the sleep mode speed, the drive enters boost status. If P 5.12.7.6 Setpoint Boost is not set, the drive enters sleep
mode.
2. After P 5.12.7.7 Maximum Boost Time, the drive ramps the motor speed down to P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz].
3. The drive activates P 5.7.1 Function at Stop. The drive is now in sleep mode.
4. When the error between reference and feedback is greater than P 5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Difference, and the
condition lasts more than P 5.12.7.3 Minimum Sleep Time, the drive is out of sleep mode.
5. The drive reverts to closed loop control.

The sequence when running sleep mode in closed loop ([2] Feedback is selected in P 5.12.7.1 Sleep Mode in Process
Closed-loop Mode)
1. When the error between reference and feedback is greater than P 5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Difference, the drive enters
boost status. If P 5.12.7.6 Setpoint Boost is not set, the drive enters sleep mode.
2. After P 5.12.7.7 Maximum Boost Time, the drive ramps the motor speed down to P 5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz].
3. The drive activates P 5.7.1 Function at Stop. The drive is now in sleep mode.
4. When the error between reference and feedback is greater than P 5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Difference, and the
condition lasts more than P 5.12.7.3 Minimum Sleep Time, the drive is out of sleep mode.
5. The drive reverts to closed loop control.

182 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

NOTICE
Sleep mode is not active when local reference is active (set speed manually with navigation buttons on the control panel). Does
not work in Local mode. Remote setup in open loop must be carried out before setting input/output in closed loop.

P 5.12.7.1 Sleep Mode in Process Closed-loop Mode

This parameter is for sleep mode running in process closed loop. Use this parameter to set whether the feedback is detected for entering
sleep mode.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 2202 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Feed. and Speed Feedback is detected together with the speed.

1 Speed Feedback is not detected, only sleep speed and time are
checked.

2 Feedback Feedback is detected only.

P 5.12.7.2 Minimum Run Time

Set the minimum running time for the motor after a start command (digital input or bus) before entering the sleep mode.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–600)

Parameter 2240 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.3 Minimum Sleep Time

Set the minimum time for staying in sleep mode. This setting overrides any wake-up conditions.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–600)

Parameter 2241 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.4 Wake-Up Speed [Hz]

This parameter is used when P 5.4.2 Operation Mode is set for open loop, and the speed reference is from an external controller. Set the
reference speed when the Sleep Mode is deactivated.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (0–4000)

Parameter 2243 Unit: Hz

number:

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 183

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Difference

This parameter is used when P 5.4.2 Operation Mode is set for process closed loop. Set the allowed pressure drop in percentage of
setpoint for the pressure (Pset) before canceling the sleep mode.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–100)

Parameter 2244 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.6 Setpoint Boost

This parameter is used when P 5.4.2 Operation Mode is set for process closed loop. In systems with, for example, constant pressure
control, it is advantageous to increase the system pressure before the motor is stopped. This extends the time when the motor is stopped
and help to avoid frequent start/stop. Set the overpressure/temperature in percentage of setpoint for the pressure (Pset)/temperature
before entering the Sleep Mode. If setting for 5%, the boost pressure is Pset*1.05. The negative values can be used for, for example,
cooling tower control where a negative change is needed.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-100–100)

Parameter 2245 Unit: %

number:

Data type: int8 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.7 Maximum Boost Time

This parameter is used when P 5.4.2 Operation Mode is set for process closed loop. Set the maximum time of the boost mode. If the set
time exceeds, the drive does not wait for the set boost pressure to be reached, and enters the sleep mode.

Default value: 60 Parameter type: Range (0–600)

Parameter 2246 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.8 Sleep Speed [Hz]

Set the sleep speed. When the drive speed is below the sleep speed, the drive enters the sleep mode.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4000)

Parameter 2247 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.9 Sleep Delay Time

Set the delay time for the motor to wait before entering the sleep mode when the condition of entering sleep mode is met.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–3600)

184 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 2248 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 5.12.7.10 Wake-Up Delay Time

Set the delay time for the motor to wait before waking up from sleep mode when the condition of waking up is met.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–3600)

Parameter 2249 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.6.12 Fieldbus Process Data (Menu Index 5.27)

P 5.27.1 PCD Write Selection

Use this parameter to select the parameters to be assigned to the PCD's telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. The values in the PCDs are then written to the selected parameters as data values.

Enter up to 16 different preset mapping 0–15 in this parameter, using array programming. If this parameter is active, addresses 2810–
2825 represent values of the 16 parameters. If this parameter is not active, addresses 2810 and 2811 are used as input-data-drive control
word and bus reference. Addresses 2812–2825 are reserved.

Default value: 0 [None] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 842 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 Minimum Reference

2 Maximum Reference

3 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

4 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

5 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

6 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

7 Jog Ramp Time

8 Quick Stop Time

9 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

10 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 185

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

11 Digital & Relay Bus Control

13 Terminal 31 Output Bus Control

15 FC Port CTW

16 FC Port REF

81 User Define 0

82 User Define 1

83 User Define 2

84 User Define 3

85 User Define 4

86 User Define 5

87 User Define 6

88 User Define 7

P 5.27.2 PCD Read Selection

Use this parameter to select the parameters to be assigned to the PCDs of the telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual data values of the selected parameters.

Enter up to 16 different preset mapping 0–15 in this parameter, using array programming. If this parameter is active, addresses 2910–
2925 represent values of the 16 parameters. If this parameter is not active, addresses 2910 and 2911 are used as status word register and
main actual value. Addresses 2912–2925 are reserved.

Default value: 0 [None] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 843 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 Operation Hours

2 Running Hours

3 kWh Counter

4 Control Word

5 Reference [Unit]

6 Reference %

7 Status Word

186 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

8 Main Actual Value [%]

9 Custom Readout

10 Power [kW]

11 Power [hp]

12 Motor Voltage

13 Frequency

14 Motor Current

15 Frequency [%]

16 Torque [Nm]

17 Motor Thermal

18 DC Link Voltage

19 Heat Sink Temperature

20 Inverter Thermal

22 External Reference

23 Feedback [Unit]

24 Digital Input 13, 14, 15, 17, 18

25 Terminal 33 Switch Setting

26 Analog Input 33

27 Terminal 34 Switch Setting

28 Analog Input 34

29 Analog Output 31 [mA]

30 Relay Output

33 Fault Word

34 Warning Word

35 External Status Word

39 Fault Word 2

40 Warning Word 2

43 Speed [RPM]

44 Digital Output

54 External Status Word 2

55 Fault Word 3

56 Warning Word 3

81 User Define 8

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 187

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

82 User Define 9

83 User Define 10

84 User Define 11

85 User Define 12

86 User Define 13

87 User Define 14

88 User Define 15

100 Main Actual Value [N2]

P 5.27.3 PCD User Define

Customize the User define X of Parameter PCD Write Configuration or PCD Read Configuration, [0-7] for PCD Write, [8-15] for PCD Read.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 844 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.7 Maintenance and Service (Menu Index 6)

7.7.1 Status (Menu Index 6.1)
P 6.1.1 Latest Fault Number

Use this parameter to view the fault logs. 10 fault logs can be viewed. 0 contains the most recent logged fault, and 9 has the oldest
logged fault.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–255)

Parameter 1530 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read

P 6.1.2 Operating Hours

Use this parameter to view how many hours the frequency converter has run. The value is saved when the drive is turned off.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–2147483647)

Parameter 1500 Unit: h

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

188 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 6.1.3 Running Hours

Use this parameter to view how many hours the motor has run. Reset the counter with P 6.1.9 Reset Running Hours Counter. The value is
saved when the drive is turned off.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–2147483647)

Parameter 1501 Unit: h

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 6.1.4 kWh Counter

Register the power consumption of the motor as an average value over 1 hour. Reset the counter in P 6.1.8 Reset kWh Counter.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–2147483647)

Parameter 1502 Unit: kWh

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 6.1.5 Power Up's

Use this parameter to view the number of times the frequency converter has been powered up.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–2147483647)

Parameter 1503 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 6.1.6 Over Temp's

Use this parameter to view the number of frequency converter temperature faults that have occurred since production.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1504 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 6.1.7 Over Volt's

Use this parameter to view the number of frequency converter overvoltages that have occurred since production.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–65535)

Parameter 1505 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 6.1.8 Reset kWh Counter

Use this parameter to reset the kWh counter to zero (see P 6.1.4 kWh Counter).

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 189

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 [Do not reset] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1506 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the available selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Do Not Reset

1 Reset Counter

P 6.1.9 Reset Running Hours Counter

Use this parameter to reset the Running Hours counter to zero (see P 6.1.3 Running Hours).

Default value: 0 [Do not reset] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1507 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Do Not Reset

1 Reset Counter

P 6.1.10 Internal Fault Reason

Use this parameter to view a description of the error. This parameter is used in combination with fault 38 Internal Fault.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-32767–32767)

Parameter 1531 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 6.1.11 Fault Log: Time

Use this parameter to view the time when the logged event occurred. Time is measured in seconds from drive start-up.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–2147483647)

Parameter 1532 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

190 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.7.2 Software Information (Menu Index 6.2)

P 6.2.1 Application Version

Use this parameter to view the combined software version consisting of power software and control software.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1543 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.2.2 SW ID Control Card

Use this parameter to view the control board software version number.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1549 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.2.3 SW ID Power Card

Use this parameter to view the power card software version number.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1550 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.2.7 ECP SW Version

View the ECP ID number.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1548 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

7.7.3 Cooling Fan (Menu Index 6.5)

P 6.5.1 Fan Control Mode

Use this parameter to select the fan control mode.

Default value: 7 [On when Inverter is on, otherwise off] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1452 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 191

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

The following are the selections for the parameter:

Selection number Selection name

5 Constant-on Mode

6 Constant-off Mode

7 On-when-inverter-is-on-else-off Mode

7.7.4 Parameter Handling (Menu Index 6.6)

P 6.6.1 Active Set-up

Use this parameter to select the setup to control the drive functions. Use Multi setup for remote selection.

Default value: 1 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 10 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

1 Set-up 1

2 Set-up 2

9 Multi Set-up

P 6.6.2 Programming Set-up

Use this parameter to select the setup to be edited. The setup is configured by control panel when it is accessed by control panel, and by
RS485 when accessed by RS485.

Default value: 9 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 11 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

1 Set-up 1

2 Set-up 2

9 Active Set-up

192 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 6.6.3 Link Setups

Use this parameter to link or unlink setups. The link ensures synchronizing of the parameters that cannot be changed while the motor is
running. When setups are linked, it is possible to shift from 1 setup to another during operation. When selecting linked, the parameter
values of Edit Set-up are overwritten with the values of the other setup.

Default value: 20 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 12 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Not linked

20 Linked

P 6.6.4 Set-up Copy

Use this parameter to copy parameters between set-ups.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 51 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No copy

1 Copy from Set-up 1

2 Copy from Set-up 2

9 Copy from Factory Set-up

P 6.6.6 Reset Mode

Use this parameter to define whether the frequency converter waits for a manual reset, or resets itself automatically after tripping. In
manual reset mode, press the Stop/Reset button or use digital inputs to reset the frequency converter.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1420 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 193

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

NOTICE
In automatic reset mode, the motor can start without a warning.

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Manual reset Perform a reset via Stop/Reset button or via the digital inputs.

1 Automatic reset x 1

2 Automatic reset x 2

3 Automatic reset x 3

4 Automatic reset x 4

5 Automatic reset x 5

6 Automatic reset x 6

7 Automatic reset x 7

8 Automatic reset x 8

9 Automatic reset x 9

10 Automatic reset x 10

11 Automatic reset x 15

12 Automatic reset x 20

13 Infinite auto reset Select for continuous resetting after tripping.

14 Reset at power-up

NOTICE
If the specified number of automatic resets is reached within 10 minutes, the frequency converter enters [0] Manual Reset Mode.
After the manual rest is performed, the setting of P 6.6.6 Reset Mode reverts to the original selection. If the number of automatic
resets is not reached within 10 minutes, or when a manual reset is performed, the internal automatic reset counter returns to 0.

P 6.6.7 Automatic Restart Time

Use this parameter to enter the time interval from the trip event to the automatic reset. This parameter is active when P 6.6.6 Reset Mode
is set to a selection between [1]–[13].

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (0–600)

Parameter 1421 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

NOTICE
A value of 0s cannot be set when P 6.6.6 Reset Mode is set to [13] Infinite auto reset.

194 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 6.6.8 Operation Mode

Use this parameter to select the drive operation mode. To reset drive parameter values to default, select [2] Initialization. The
communication related parameters remain unchanged. The frequency converter resets during the next power-up.

Default value: 0 [Normal operation] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1422 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Normal operation

2 Initialization

P 6.6.9 Service Code

This parameter is intended for use by service technicians only.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 1429 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 6.6.12 ECP Copy

Use this parameter to select the ECP copy functions.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 50 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No copy Do not copy any parameter.

1 All to ECP Copy all parameters in all setups from drive to ECP.

2 All from ECP Copy all parameters in all setups from ECP to drive.

3 Size indep. from ECP Copy only parameters which are independent of motor size, w/o
disturbing motor data already set.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 195

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 6.6.20 Password

Use this parameter to define the password for access to the Main Menu via the Home button. Setting the value to 0 disables the password
function.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–999)

Parameter 60 Unit: –
number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 6.6.26 Language

Use this parameter to define the language to be used in the display.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 English

10 ㆗⽂

7.7.5 Drive Identification (Menu Index 6.7)

P 6.7.1 Drive Type

Use this parameter to view the product type of the drive. The readout is identical to the frequency converter series power field of the
model code definition, characters 1–6.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1540 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.7.2 Power Section

Use this parameter to view the current rating of the drive. The readout is identical to the frequency converter series power field of the
model code definition, characters 7–10.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1541 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

196 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 6.7.3 Voltage

Use this parameter to view the mains voltage of the drive. The readout is identical to the frequency converter series power field of the
model code definition.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1542 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.7.4 Ordered Model Code

Use this parameter to view the model code string used for reordering the frequency converter in its original configuration.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1544 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.7.6 Drive Ordering No

Use this parameter to view the code number used for reordering the drive in its original configuration.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1546 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.7.7 Drive Serial Number

Use this parameter to view the serial number of the frequency converter.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1551 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

P 6.7.9 Power Card Serial Number

Use this parameter to view the serial number of the power card.

Default value: – Parameter type: –

Parameter 1553 Unit: –

number:

Data type: VisibleString Access type: Read

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 197

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.8 Customization (Menu Index 8)

7.8.1 Custom Readout (Menu Index 8.1)
P 8.1.1 Custom Readout

View the user-defined readouts as defined in parameters P 8.1.2 Custom Readout Unit, P 8.1.3 Custom Readout Min Value, and P 8.1.4
Custom Readout Max Value.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–9999.00)

Parameter 1609 Unit: CustomReadoutUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 8.1.1 Custom Readout Unit

Set the user-defined readouts unit.

Default value: 1 [%] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 30 Unit: –
number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the available selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 None

1 %

5 PPM

10 1/min

11 RPM

12 Pulse/s

20 l/s

21 l/min

22 l/h

23 m³/s

24 m³/min

25 m³/h

30 kg/s

31 kg/min

32 kg/h

33 t/min

198 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

34 t/h

40 m/s

41 m/min

45 m

60 °C

70 mbar

71 bar

72 Pa

73 kPa

74 m WG

80 kW

120 GPM

121 gal/s

122 gal/min

123 gal/h

124 CFM

127 ft³/h

140 ft/s

141 ft/min

160 °F

170 psi

171 lb/in2

172 in WG

173 ft WG

180 HP

P 8.1.3 Custom Readout Min Value

Set the custom readout value that corresponds to zero speed.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–999999.99)

Parameter 31 Unit: CustomReadoutUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 199

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 8.1.4 Custom Readout Max Value

Set the custom readout value that corresponds to motor high speed limit.

Default value: 100.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–999999.99)

Parameter 32 Unit: CustomReadoutUnit

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

7.8.2 Smart Logic Controller (Menu Index 8.4)

7.8.2.1 Overview of Smart Logic Controller
The Smart Logic Controller, also called SLC, is a logic controller which can be used together with logical operations of the drive.

The Smart Logic Controller manages sequences via an event/action handling. Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs
(states), which means if an event is evaluated as true, the linked action in each state is executed. After this, the next event is evaluated
and its belonging action is executed, and so on. Only 1 event is evaluated at a time. No matter in which state the sequence stops last
time, the sequence always starts at state 0. If an event is evaluated as false, the SLC takes no action during the scan interval and no other
events are evaluated. It is possible to program up to 20 states in the controller. When the last event/action is executed, the sequence
starts again from event/action 0. See Figure 78.

l Set P 8.4.2.1 Enable Controller to [1] On to enable the sequence controller of the SLC.
l Set P 8.4.2.2 Start Controller to start the sequence controller function.
l Set P 8.4.2.3 Stop Controller or disable the SLC in P 8.4.2.1 Enable Controller to stop the sequence.
l To reset all SLC parameters, select [1] Reset SLC in P 8.4.2.4 Reset Controller and start programming from scratch.

The controller is common for all setups. If setups are changed during the execution of the sequence, the sequence continues from the
last state.

Start event
e30bv190.10

P 8.4.2.2

State 1
Event 1/
Action 1 State 2
Stop event Event 2/
P 8.4.2.3 Action 2

Stop event
P 8.4.2.3
State 4
Event 4/
Action 4
State 3
Event 3/
Action 3

Stop event
P 8.4.2.3

Figure 78: Example with Events/Actions

NOTICE
SLC is only active in Remote mode, not in Local mode.

7.8.2.2 Status (Menu Index 8.4.1)

P 8.4.1.1 Controller State

View the actual state of the Smart Logic Controller (SLC).

200 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–20)

Parameter 1638 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read

P 8.4.1.2 Counter A

View the present value of Counter A. Counters are useful as comparator operands, see P 8.4.3.1 Comparator Operand. The value can be
reset or changed either via digital inputs (parameter group P 9.4 Digital Inputs/Outputs) or by using an SLC action (P 8.4.6.2 Action).

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-32768–32767)

Parameter 1672 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

P 8.4.1.3 Counter B

View the present value of Counter B. Counters are useful as comparator operands, see P 8.4.3.1 Comparator Operand. The value can be
reset or changed either via digital inputs (parameter group P 9.4 Digital Inputs/Outputs) or by using an SLC action (P 8.4.6.2 Action).

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-32768–32767)

Parameter 1673 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int16 Access type: Read

7.8.2.3 SLC Settings (Menu Index 8.4.2)

Use SLC settings to activate, deactivate, and reset the Smart Logic Control.

P 8.4.2.1 Enable Controller

Enable or disable the Smart Logic Control.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1300 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Off Enable the start of Smart Logic Control when a start command is
present, for example, via a digital input.

1 On Disable the Smart Logic Control.

P 8.4.2.2 Start Controller

Select the condition (TRUE or FALSE) to activate the Smart Logic Controller.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 201

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 39 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1301 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

202 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

P 8.4.2.3 Stop Controller

Select the condition (TRUE or FALSE) to deactivate the Smart Logic Controller.

Default value: 40 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1302 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 203

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

30 SL Time-out 0 Use result of timer 0 in logic rule.

31 SL Time-out 1 Use result of timer 1 in logic rule.

32 SL Time-out 2 Use result of timer 2 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

70 SL Time-out 3 Use result of timer 3 in logic rule.

71 SL Time-out 4 Use result of timer 4 in logic rule.

72 SL Time-out 5 Use result of timer 5 in logic rule.

73 SL Time-out 6 Use result of timer 6 in logic rule.

74 SL Time-out 7 Use result of timer 7 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

P 8.4.2.4 Reset Controller

Select to reset parameters to default settings.

204 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1303 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Do not reset SLC Do not reset SLC.

1 Reset SLC Reset all SLC parameters to default settings.

7.8.2.4 Comparators (Menu Index 8.4.3)

Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables (output frequency, output current, analog input, and so on) to fixed preset
values.
e30bv191.10

P 8.4.3.2
Comparator Operator
P 8.4.3.1
Comparator Operand
=
P 8.4.3.3 TRUE longer than.
Comparator Value ...
...

Figure 79: Comparator Parameters

In addition, there are digital values which are compared to fixed time values. See explanation in P 8.4.3.1 Comparator Operand.
Comparators are evaluated once in each scan interval. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) directly. All parameters in this parameter group are
array parameters with index 0–5. Select index 0 to program Comparator 0, select index 1 to program Comparator 1, and so on.

P 8.4.3.1 Comparator Operand

Select the variable to be monitored by the comparator. This is an array parameter containing comparators 0–5.

Default value: 1 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1310 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled Comparator is disabled.

1 Reference Resulting remote reference (not local) as a percentage.

2 Feedback Feedback in [Hz].

3 Motor speed Motor speed in [Hz].

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 205

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

4 Motor Current Motor current in [A].

6 Motor power Motor power in either [kW] or [hp].

7 Motor voltage Motor voltage in [V].

12 Analog input AI33 Expressed as actual value.

13 Analog input AI34 Expressed as actual value.

19 Pulse input FI18 Expressed as actual value.

20 Alarm number Shows number of the alarm.

30 Counter A Number of counts.

31 Counter B Number of counts.

P 8.4.3.2 Comparator Operator

Select the operator to be used in the comparison. This is an array parameter containing comparator operators 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1311 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Less Than (<) Result of evaluation is True if variable selected in P 8.4.3.1

Comparator Operand is smaller than fixed value in P 8.4.3.3
Comparator Value. Result is False if variable selected in P 8.4.3.1
Comparator Operand is greater than fixed value in P 8.4.3.3
Comparator Value.

1 Approx. Equal (~) Result of evaluation is True if variable selected in P 8.4.3.1

Comparator Operand is approximately equal to fixed value in P
8.4.3.3 Comparator Value.

2 Greater Than (>) Inverse logic of selection 0.

P 8.4.3.3 Comparator Value

Enter the "trigger level" for the variable which is monitored by this comparator. This is an array parameter containing comparator values
0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (-9999000–9999000)

Parameter 1312 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

206 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.8.2.5 Timers (Menu Index 8.4.4)

Use the timer results to define an event (P 8.4.6.1 Event) or as boolean input in a logic rule (P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1, P 8.4.5.3 Logic
Rule Boolean 2, or P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3).

When timer value has elapsed timer changes state from False to True.

P 8.4.4.1 Timer

Enter the value to define the duration of the FALSE output from the programmed timer. A timer is only FALSE if it is started by an action
(see P 8.4.6.2 Action [29–31] and P 8.4.6.2 Action [70–74] Start timer X) and until the timer value has elapsed. This is an array parameter
containing timers 0–7.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–360000)

Parameter 1320 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.8.2.6 Logic Rules (Menu Index 8.4.5)

Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits, and events using the logical
operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select boolean inputs for the calculation in P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1, P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
and P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the operators used to logically combine the selected inputs in P 8.4.5.2 Logic Rule Operator 1
and P 8.4.5.4 Logic Rule Operator 2.

P 8.4.5.2 P 8.4.5.4
e30bv192.10

Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2

P 8.4.5.1
Logic Rule Boolean 1
P 8.4.5.3
Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
... ...
...

P 8.4.5.5
Logic Rule Boolean 3

Figure 80: Parameters for Logic Rules

Priority of calculation

The results of P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1, P 8.4.5.2 Logic Rule Operator 1, and P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated first.
The outcome (TRUE/FALSE) of this calculation is combined with the settings of P 8.4.5.4 Logic Rule Operator 2 and P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule
Boolean 3, yielding the final result (TRUE/FALSE) of the logic rule.

P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Select the 1st boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the selected logic rule. This is an array parameter containing logical rules 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1340 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 207

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

30 SL Time-out 0 Use result of timer 0 in logic rule.

31 SL Time-out 1 Use result of timer 1 in logic rule.

32 SL Time-out 2 Use result of timer 2 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

208 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

70 SL Time-out 3 Use result of timer 3 in logic rule.

71 SL Time-out 4 Use result of timer 4 in logic rule.

72 SL Time-out 5 Use result of timer 5 in logic rule.

73 SL Time-out 6 Use result of timer 6 in logic rule.

74 SL Time-out 7 Use result of timer 7 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

P 8.4.5.2 Logic Rule Operator 1

Select the 1st logical operator to use on the Boolean inputs from P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 and P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2. This is
an array parameter containing logical operators 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1341 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled Ignores P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2, P 8.4.5.4 Logic Rule

Operator 2, and P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

1 AND Evaluates expression P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 AND P 8.4.5.3

Logic Rule Boolean 2.

2 OR Evaluates expression P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 OR P 8.4.5.3

Logic Rule Boolean 2.

3 AND NOT Evaluates expression P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 AND NOT P
8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

4 OR NOT Evaluates expression P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 OR NOT P

8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

5 NOT AND Evaluates expression NOT P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 AND P
8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

6 NOT OR Evaluates expression NOT P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 OR P

8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 209

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

7 NOT AND NOT Evaluates expression NOT P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 AND
NOT P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

8 NOT OR NOT Evaluates expression NOT P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 OR NOT
P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Select the 2nd boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the selected logic rule. This is an array parameter containing logical rules 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1342 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

210 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

30 SL Time-out 0 Use result of timer 0 in logic rule.

31 SL Time-out 1 Use result of timer 1 in logic rule.

32 SL Time-out 2 Use result of timer 2 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

70 SL Time-out 3 Use result of timer 3 in logic rule.

71 SL Time-out 4 Use result of timer 4 in logic rule.

72 SL Time-out 5 Use result of timer 5 in logic rule.

73 SL Time-out 6 Use result of timer 6 in logic rule.

74 SL Time-out 7 Use result of timer 7 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

P 8.4.5.4 Logic Rule Operator 2

Select the 2nd logical operator to be used on the Boolean input calculated in P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1, P 8.4.5.2 Logic Rule Operator
1, and P 8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the boolean input coming from P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3. This is an array parameter
containing logical operators 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1343 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 211

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled Ignores P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

1 AND Evaluates expression [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P 8.4.5.3

Logic Rule Boolean 2] AND P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

2 OR Evaluates expression [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P 8.4.5.3

Logic Rule Boolean 2] OR P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

3 AND NOT Evaluates expression [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P 8.4.5.3
Logic Rule Boolean 2] AND NOT P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

4 OR NOT Evaluates expression [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P 8.4.5.3

Logic Rule Boolean 2] OR NOT P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

5 NOT AND Evaluates expression NOT [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P
8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2] AND P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

6 NOT OR Evaluates expression NOT [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P

8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2] OR P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

7 NOT AND NOT Evaluates expression NOT [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P
8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2] AND NOT P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule
Boolean 3.

8 NOT OR NOT Evaluates expression NOT [P 8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1/P
8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2] OR NOT P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean
3.

P 8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Select the 3rd boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the selected logic rule. This is an array parameter containing logical rules 0–5.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1344 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

212 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

30 SL Time-out 0 Use result of timer 0 in logic rule.

31 SL Time-out 1 Use result of timer 1 in logic rule.

32 SL Time-out 2 Use result of timer 2 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

70 SL Time-out 3 Use result of timer 3 in logic rule.

71 SL Time-out 4 Use result of timer 4 in logic rule.

72 SL Time-out 5 Use result of timer 5 in logic rule.

73 SL Time-out 6 Use result of timer 6 in logic rule.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 213

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

74 SL Time-out 7 Use result of timer 7 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

7.8.2.7 States (Menu Index 8.4.6)

P 8.4.6.1 Event

Select the boolean input (TRUE or FALSE) to define the Smart Logic Controller event. This is an array parameter containing SLC events 0–
19.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1351 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FALSE Enters False in logic rule.

1 TRUE Enters True in logic rule.

2 Running See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [5] for description.

3 In range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [7] for description.

4 On reference See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [8] for description.

7 Out of current range See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [12] for description.

8 Below I low See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [13] for description.

9 Above I high See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [14] for description.

16 Thermal warning See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [21] for description.

17 Mains out of range Mains voltage is outside the specified voltage range.

18 Reversing See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay [25] for description.

19 Warning A warning is active.

20 Alarm (trip) A trip alarm is active.

21 Alarm (trip lock) A trip lock alarm is active.

22 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

23 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

24 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

25 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

26 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

27 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

28 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

214 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

29 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

30 SL Time-out 0 Use result of timer 0 in logic rule.

31 SL Time-out 1 Use result of timer 1 in logic rule.

32 SL Time-out 2 Use result of timer 2 in logic rule.

33 Digital input T13 Use value of DI1 in logic rule.

34 Digital input T14 Use value of DI2 in logic rule.

35 Digital input T15 Use value of DIO in logic rule.

36 Digital input T17 Use value of DI3 in logic rule.

39 Start command This event is True, if frequency converter is started by any means
(digital input or other).

40 Drive stopped This event is True, if frequency converter is stopped or coasted by

any means (digital input or other).

42 Auto Reset Trip An auto reset is performed.

50 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

51 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

60 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

61 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

70 SL Time-out 3 Use result of timer 3 in logic rule.

71 SL Time-out 4 Use result of timer 4 in logic rule.

72 SL Time-out 5 Use result of timer 5 in logic rule.

73 SL Time-out 6 Use result of timer 6 in logic rule.

74 SL Time-out 7 Use result of timer 7 in logic rule.

83 Lost Load Lost load is performed.

P 8.4.6.2 Action

Select the action corresponding to the SLC event. Actions are executed when the corresponding event (defined in P 8.4.6.1 Event) is
evaluated as TRUE. This is an array parameter containing SLC actions 0–19.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1352 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 215

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Disabled Function is disabled.

1 No action No action is taken.

2 Select set-up 1 Changes active setup to setup 1.

3 Select set-up 2 Changes active setup to setup 2.

10 Select preset ref 0 Selects preset reference 0.

11 Select preset ref 1 Selects preset reference 1.

12 Select preset ref 2 Selects preset reference 2.

13 Select preset ref 3 Selects preset reference 3.

14 Select preset ref 4 Selects preset reference 4.

15 Select preset ref 5 Selects preset reference 5.

16 Select preset ref 6 Selects preset reference 6.

17 Select preset ref 7 Selects preset reference 7.

18 Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.

19 Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2.

22 Run Issues start command to drive.

23 Run reverse Issues start reverse command to drive.

24 Stop Issues stop command to drive.

25 Qstop Issues quick stop command to drive.

26 DC Brake Issues DC brake command to drive.

27 Coast The drive coasts immediately. All stop commands including coast
command stop the SLC.

28 Freeze output Freezes output frequency.

29 Start timer 0 Starts timer 0.

30 Start timer 1 Starts timer 1.

31 Start timer 2 Starts timer 2.

32 Set digital out A low Set Digital output A low.

33 Set digital out B low Set Digital output B low.

38 Set digital out A high Set Digital output A high.

39 Set digital out B high Set Digital output B high.

60 Reset Counter A Resets counter A to 0.

61 Reset Counter B Resets counter B to 0.

70 Start Timer 3 Starts timer 3.

71 Start Timer 4 Starts timer 4.

216 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

72 Start Timer 5 Starts timer 5.

73 Start Timer 6 Starts timer 6.

74 Start Timer 7 Starts timer 7.

100 ResetAlarm Reset the alarm.

7.9 I/O (Menu Index 9)

7.9.1 I/O (Menu Index 9.3)
7.9.1.1 I/O Status (Menu Index 9.3)
P 9.3.1 Digital Input Status

View actual state of the digital inputs. The value should be analyzed using binary type. 0=no signal, 1=connected signal. From the right
side to the left, bit 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 represent DI 18, 17, 15, 14, 13, respectively.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4095)

Parameter 1660 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

The following are the bit descriptions.

Bit number Bit description

Bit 0 Digital input terminal 18

Bit 2 Digital input terminal 17

Bit 3 Digital input terminal 15

Bit 4 Digital input terminal 14

Bit 5 Digital input terminal 13

P 9.3.2 Digital Output Status

View the binary value of all digital outputs. (0=low output, 1=high output, '_'=Not digital output configuration). From the right side to
the left, bit 3 represent DO 15.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–63)

Parameter 1666 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

The following are the bit descriptions.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 217

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Bit number Bit description

Bit 3 Digital output terminal 15

P 9.3.3 T31 Analog Output [mA]

View the actual value at output 31 in mA. The value shown reflects the selection in P 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode and P 9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output.

Default value: 0.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 1665 Unit: mA

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 9.3.4 T33 Setting

View the setting of input terminal 33 (current or voltage).

Default value: 1 [Voltage mode] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1661 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Current mode

1 Voltage mode

P 9.3.5 T33 Analog Input

View actual input on analog input 33.

Default value: 1.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 1662 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 9.3.6 T34 Setting

View the setting of input terminal 34 (current or voltage).

Default value: 1 [Voltage mode] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 1663 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read

The following are the selections for the parameter.

218 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

0 Current mode

1 Voltage mode

P 9.3.7 T34 Analog Input

View actual input on analog input 34 (current or voltage).

Default value: 1.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 1664 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 9.3.8 T18 Pulse Input [Hz]

View the actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 18 as an impulse input.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–130000)

Parameter 1668 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 9.3.9 T15 Pulse Output [Hz]

View the actual value of impulses applied to terminal 15 in digital output mode.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–40000)

Parameter 1669 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read

P 9.3.10 Relay Output

View the state of the relay outputs. The value should be analyzed using binary type. (0=off, 1=on). From the far right to left,
corresponding to bit 4 is Relay Output 1.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–31)

Parameter 1671 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

7.9.2 Digital Inputs/Outputs (Menu Index 9.4)

7.9.2.1 Digital Input Setting (Menu Index 9.4.1)
P 9.4.1.1 Digital I/O mode

For digital I/O: Select [0] PNP for action on positive directional pulses. PNP are pulled down to GND. Select [1] NPN systems for action on
negative directional pulses. NPN are pulled up to +24 V, inside the drive.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 219

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 [PNP] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 500 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 PNP Action on positive directional pulses (0). PNP systems are pulled
down to ground (GND).

1 NPN Action on negative directional pulses (1). NPN systems are pulled
up to +24 V internally in the frequency converter.

P 9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input

Select the function from the available digital input range.

Default value: 8 [Start] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 510 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation No reaction to signals transmitted to the terminal.

1 Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/alarm. Not all alarms
can be reset.

2 Coast Inverse Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

3 Coast and Reset Inverse Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free
mode and resets frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.
Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.

4 Quick Stop Inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with the
quick stop ramp time set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0⇒Quick-stop.

5 DC-brake Inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by
energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See P
5.7.4 DC Brake Current % to P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency. The
function is only active when the value in P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time is
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC braking.

220 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

6 Stop Inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop function when the
selected terminal goes from logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp time (P 5.5.4.3 Ramp 1
Decel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time).
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

8 Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1=start, logic 0=stop.

9 Latched Start The motor starts when a pulse is applied for minimum 4 ms. The
motor stops when stop commands are given.

10 Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1

to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of
rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both
directions in P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction. The function is not active
in process closed loop.

11 Start Reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on
start are not allowed at the same time.

12 Enable Start Forward Disengage the counterclockwise movement and allows for the
clockwise direction.

13 Enable Start Reverse Disengage the clockwise movement and allows for the
counterclockwise direction.

14 Jog Use to activate jog speed. See P 5.9.2 Jog Reference 1.

15 Preset Reference On Shift between external reference and preset reference. It is

assumed that [1] External/preset has been selected in P 5.5.3.5
Reference Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; logic 1=1
of the preset references is active.

16 Preset Ref. Bit 0 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

17 Preset Ref. Bit 1 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

18 Preset Ref. Bit 2 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

19 Freeze Reference Freeze the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/
condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to be used.
If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Timeand P 5.5.4.10
Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 221

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

20 Freeze Output Freeze the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point
of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to
be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed
change always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and
P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency.
Note: When [20] Freeze output is active, the frequency converter
cannot be stopped by setting the signal on [8] Start to low.
Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed for [2]
Coasting inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

21 Speed Up Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time.

22 Speed Down Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time.

23 Set-up Select Bit 0 Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 to select 1 of the 2 set-ups. Set P
6.6.1 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up.

25 Start and Coast Select [25] Start and Coast for a start command or coast stop.
Logic 1=start, logic 0=coast stop.

28 Catch Up Increase reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

29 Slow Down Reduce reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

34 Ramp Bit 0 Enable a selection from the 2 ramps available.

45 Latched Start Reverse The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

51 External Interlock This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated alarm.

60 Counter A (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter A.

61 Counter A (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter A.

62 Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

222 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

63 Counter B (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter B.

64 Counter B (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter B.

65 Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.

101 Sleep A signal applied puts the frequency converter into sleep mode.

Table 65: Preset Ref Bit

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref.0 0 0 0

Preset ref. 1 0 0 1

Preset ref. 2 0 1 0

Preset ref. 3 0 1 1

Preset ref. 4 1 0 0

Preset ref. 5 1 0 1

Preset ref. 6 1 1 0

Preset ref. 7 1 1 1

Table 66: Shut Down/Catch up

Shut down Catch up

Unchanged speed 0 0

Reduced by % value 1 0

Increased by % value 0 1

Reduced by % value 1 1

P 9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input

Select the function from the available digital input range.

Default value: 10 [Reversing] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 511 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 223

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation No reaction to signals transmitted to the terminal.

1 Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/alarm. Not all alarms
can be reset.

2 Coast Inverse Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

3 Coast and Reset Inverse Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free
mode and resets frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.
Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.

4 Quick Stop Inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with the
quick stop ramp time set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0⇒Quick-stop.

5 DC-brake Inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by
energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See
P 5.7.4 DC Brake Current to P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency. The
function is only active when the value in P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time is
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC braking.

6 Stop Inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop function when the
selected terminal goes from logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp time (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2
Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time).
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

8 Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1=start, logic 0=stop.

9 Latched Start The motor starts when a pulse is applied for minimum 4 ms. The
motor stops when stop commands are given.

10 Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1

to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of
rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both
directions in P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction. The function is not active
in process closed loop.

11 Start Reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on
start are not allowed at the same time.

12 Enable Start Forward Disengage the counterclockwise movement and allows for the
clockwise direction.

13 Enable Start Reverse Disengage the clockwise movement and allows for the
counterclockwise direction.

14 Jog Use to activate jog speed. See P 5.9.2 Jog Reference 1.

224 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

15 Preset Reference On Shift between external reference and preset reference. It is

assumed that [1] External/preset has been selected in P 5.5.3.5
Reference Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; logic 1=1
of the 8 preset references is active.

16 Preset Ref. Bit 0 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

17 Preset Ref. Bit 1 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

18 Preset Ref. Bit 2 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

19 Freeze Reference Freeze the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/
condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to be used.
If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and P
5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 5.5.3.3 Reference
Maximum.

20 Freeze Output Freeze the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point
of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to
be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed
change always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and
P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency.
Note: When [20] Freeze output is active, the frequency converter
cannot be stopped by setting the signal on [8] Start to low.
Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed for [2]
Coasting inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

21 Speed Up Select [21] Speed upand [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

22 Speed Down Select [21] Speed upand [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

23 Set-up Select Bit 0 Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 to select 1 of the 2 set-ups. Set P
6.6.1 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up.

25 Start and Coast Select [25] Start and Coast for a start command or coast stop.
Logic 1=start, logic 0=coast stop.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 225

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

28 Catch Up Increase reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

29 Slow Down Reduce reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

34 Ramp Bit 0 Enable a selection from the 2 ramps available.

45 Latched Start Reverse The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

51 External Interlock This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated alarm.

60 Counter A (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter A.

61 Counter A (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter A.

62 Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

63 Counter B (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter B.

64 Counter B (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter B.

65 Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.

101 Sleep A signal applied puts the frequency converter into sleep mode.

P 9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input

Select the function from the available digital input range.

Default value: 1 [Reset] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 512 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation No reaction to signals transmitted to the terminal.

1 Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/alarm. Not all alarms
can be reset.

2 Coast Inverse Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

3 Coast and Reset Inverse Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free
mode and resets frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.
Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.

226 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

4 Quick Stop Inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with the
quick stop ramp time set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0⇒Quick-stop.
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

5 DC-brake Inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by
energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See P
5.7.4 DC Brake Current % to P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency. The
function is only active when the value in P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time is
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC braking.

6 Stop Inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop function when the
selected terminal goes from logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp time (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2
Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time).
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

8 Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1=start, logic 0=stop.

9 Latched Start The motor starts when a pulse is applied for minimum 4 ms. The
motor stops when stop commands are given.

10 Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1

to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of
rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both
directions in P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction. The function is not active
in process closed loop.

11 Start Reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on
start are not allowed at the same time.

12 Enable Start Forward Disengage the counterclockwise movement and allows for the
clockwise direction.

13 Enable Start Reverse Disengage the clockwise movement and allows for the
counterclockwise direction.

14 Jog Use to activate jog speed. See P 5.9.2 Jog Reference 1.

15 Preset Reference On Shift between external reference and preset reference. It is

assumed that [1] External/preset has been selected in P 5.5.3.5
Reference Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; logic 1=1
of the 8 preset references is active.

16 Preset Ref. Bit 0 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 227

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

17 Preset Ref. Bit 1 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

18 Preset Ref. Bit 2 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 65.

19 Freeze Reference Freeze the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/
condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to be used.
If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and P
5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 5.5.3.3 Maximum
Reference.

20 Freeze Output Freeze the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point
of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to
be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed
change always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and
P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency.
Note: When [20] Freeze output is active, the frequency converter
cannot be stopped by setting the signal on [8] Start to low.
Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed for [2]
Coasting inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

21 Speed Up Select [21] Speed upand [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

22 Speed Down Select [21] Speed upand [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

23 Set-up Select Bit 0 Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 to select 1 of the 2 set-ups. Set P
6.6.1 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up.

25 Start and Coast Select [25] Start and Coast for a start command or coast stop.
Logic 1=start, logic 0=coast stop.

28 Catch Up Increase reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

29 Slow Down Reduce reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

34 Ramp Bit 0 Enable a selection from the 2 ramps available.

228 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

45 Latched Start Reverse The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

51 External Interlock This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated alarm.

60 Counter A (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter A.

61 Counter A (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter A.

62 Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

63 Counter B (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter B.

64 Counter B (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter B.

65 Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.

101 Sleep A signal applied puts the frequency converter into sleep mode.

P 9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input

Select the function from the available digital input range.

Default value: 14 [Jog] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 513 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation No reaction to signals transmitted to the terminal.

1 Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/alarm. Not all alarms
can be reset.

2 Coast Inverse Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

3 Coast and Reset Inverse Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free
mode and resets frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.
Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.

4 Quick Stop Inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with the
quick stop ramp time set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0⇒Quick-stop.
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 229

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

5 DC-brake Inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by
energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See P
5.7.4 DC Brake Current % to P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency. The
function is only active when the value in P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time is
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC braking.

6 Stop Inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop function when the
selected terminal goes from logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp time (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2
Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time).
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

8 Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1=start, logic 0=stop.

9 Latched Start The motor starts when a pulse is applied for minimum 4 ms. The
motor stops when stop commands are given.

10 Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1

to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of
rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both
directions in P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction. The function is not active
in process closed loop.

11 Start Reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on
start are not allowed at the same time.

12 Enable Start Forward Disengage the counterclockwise movement and allows for the
clockwise direction.

13 Enable Start Reverse Disengage the clockwise movement and allows for the
counterclockwise direction.

14 Jog Use to activate jog speed.

15 Preset Reference On Shift between external reference and preset reference. It is

assumed that [1] External/preset has been selected in P 5.5.3.5
Reference Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; logic 1=1
of the 8 preset references is active.

16 Preset Ref. Bit 0 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

17 Preset Ref. Bit 1 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

18 Preset Ref. Bit 2 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

230 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

19 Freeze Reference Freeze the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/
condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to be used.
If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and P
5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 5.5.3.3 Reference
Maximum.

20 Freeze Output Freeze the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point
of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to
be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed
change always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and
P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency.
Note: When [20] Freeze output is active, the frequency converter
cannot be stopped by setting the signal on [8] Start to low.
Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed for [2]
Coasting inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

21 Speed Up Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

22 Speed Down Select [21] Speed upand [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze reference or [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

23 Set-up Select Bit 0 Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 to select 1 of the 2 set-ups. Set P
6.6.1 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up.

25 Start and Coast Select [25] Start and Coast for a start command or coast stop.
Logic 1=start, logic 0=coast stop.

28 Catch Up Increase reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

29 Slow Down Reduce reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

34 Ramp Bit 0 Enable a selection from the 2 ramps available.

45 Latched Start Reverse The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 231

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

51 External Interlock This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated alarm.

60 Counter A (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter A.

61 Counter A (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter A.

62 Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

63 Counter B (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter B.

64 Counter B (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter B.

65 Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.

101 Sleep A signal applied puts the frequency converter into sleep mode.

P 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input

Select the function from the available digital input range.

Default value: 0 [No Operation] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 515 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation Action on positive directional pulses (0). PNP systems are pulled
down to ground (GND).

1 Reset Resets the frequency converter after a trip/alarm. Not all alarms
can be reset.

2 Coast Inverse Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The frequency converter
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

3 Coast and Reset Inverse Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free
mode and resets frequency converter. Logic 0⇒coasting stop.
Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.

4 Quick Stop Inverse Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in accordance with the
quick stop ramp time set in P 5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0⇒Quick-stop.
Note:When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

232 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

5 DC-brake Inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the motor by
energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See P
5.7.4 DC Brake Current % to P 5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency. The
function is only active when the value in P 5.7.3 DC Brake Time is
different from 0. Logic 0⇒DC braking.

6 Stop Inverse Stop inverted function. Generates a stop function when the
selected terminal goes from logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is
performed according to the selected ramp time (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2
Accel. Time and P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time).
Note: When the frequency converter is at the torque limit and
has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure
that the frequency converter stops, configure a digital output to
[27] Torque limit and stop and connect this digital output to a
digital input that is configured as coast.

8 Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1=start, logic 0=stop.

9 Latched Start The motor starts when a pulse is applied for minimum 4 ms. The
motor stops when stop commands are given.

10 Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation. Select logic 1

to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of
rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both
directions in P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction. The function is not active
in process closed loop.

11 Start Reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on
start are not allowed at the same time.

12 Enable Start Forward Disengage the counterclockwise movement and allows for the
clockwise direction.

13 Enable Start Reverse Disengage the clockwise movement and allows for the
counterclockwise direction.

14 Jog Use to activate jog speed. See P 5.9.2 Jog Reference 1.

15 Preset Reference On Shift between external reference and preset reference. It is

assumed that [1] External/preset has been selected in P 5.5.3.5
Reference Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; logic 1=1
of the 8 preset references is active.

16 Preset Ref. Bit 0 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

17 Preset Ref. Bit 1 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

18 Preset Ref. Bit 2 Preset reference bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection of 1 of the 8
preset references. See Table 66.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 233

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

19 Freeze Reference Freeze the actual reference, which is now the point of enable/
condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to be used.
If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and P
5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 5.5.3.3 Reference
Maximum.

20 Freeze Output Freeze the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is now the point
of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down to
be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] Speed downis used, the speed
change always follows ramp 2 (P 5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time and
P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time) in the range 0–P 4.2.2.4 Nominal
Frequency.
Note: When [20] Freeze output is active, the frequency converter
cannot be stopped by setting the signal on [8] Start to low.
Stop the frequency converter via a terminal programmed for [2]
Coasting inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.

21 Speed Up Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze referenceor [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

22 Speed Down Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital control of
the up/down speed is needed (motor potentiometer). Activate
this function by selecting either [19] Freeze referenceor [20]
Freeze output. When speed up/down is activated for less than
400 ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1%. If
speed up/down is activated for more than 400 ms, the resulting
reference follows the setting in ramping up/down P 5.5.4.9 Ramp
2 Accel. Time/P 5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time. See Table 66.

23 Set-up Select Bit 0 Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 or [1] Set-up select bit 1 to select 1
of the 2 set-ups. Set P 6.6.1 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up.

25 Start and Coast Select [25] Start and Coast for a start command or coast stop.
Logic 1=start, logic 0=coast stop.

28 Catch Up Increase reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

29 Slow Down Reduce reference value by percentage (relative) set in P 5.5.3.13

Freeze Up/Down Step Delta. See Table 66.

32 Pulse Input The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

34 Ramp bit 0 This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated alarm.

234 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

45 Latched Start Reverse The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse is applied for
minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop commands are
given.

46 Pulse PWM Input To enable variable duty cycle pulse signal as the reference.

51 External Interlock This function makes it possible to give an external fault to

the frequency converter. This fault is treated as an internally
generated fault.

60 Counter A (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter A.

61 Counter A (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter A.

62 Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

63 Counter B (up) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter B.

64 Counter B (down) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter B.

65 Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.

101 Sleep A signal applied puts the frequency converter into sleep mode.

Speed [RPM] Speed [RPM]

e30bb462.12

Time [sec] Time [sec]

a b
e30bb464.11

Pulse
Timer
Sample time
Time counter
Read timer: Read timer:
Time start
20 timer tides 20 timer tides

Figure 81: Duration between Pulse Flanks

7.9.2.2 T15 as Digital Output (Menu Index 9.4.2)

P 9.4.2.1 T15 Mode

Select [0] Input to define terminal 15 as a digital input. Select [1] Output to define terminal 15 as a digital output.

Default value: 0 [Input] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 501 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 235

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 Input Defines terminal 15 as a digital input.

1 Output Defines terminal 15 as a digital output.

P 9.4.2.2 T15 Digital Output

Select the function to control the digital output.

Default value: 0 [No Operation] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 530 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation Default for all digital outputs.

1 Control Ready The control card is ready.

2 Drive Ready The frequency converter is ready for operation and applies a
supply signal on the control board.

3 Drive Ready / Remote Mode The frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Remote
mode.

4 Stand-by / No Warning Ready for operation. No start or stop command is given (start/
disable). No warnings are active.

5 Running The motor is running and shaft torque is present.

6 Running / No Warning The motor is running and there are no warnings.

7 Run in Range / No Warning The motor is running within the programmed current and speed
ranges set in P 4.6.4 Warning Current Low to P 4.6.3 Warning
Current High. There are no warnings.

8 Run on Ref. / No Warning The motor runs at reference speed. No warnings.

9 Fault A fault activates the output.

10 Fault or Warning A fault or a warning activates the output.

11 At Torque Limit The torque limit set in P 5.10.1 Motor Torque Limit or P 5.10.2
Regenerative Torque Limit has been exceeded.

12 Out of Current Range The motor current is outside the range set in P 2.7.1 Output
Current Limit %.

13 Below Current, Low The motor current is lower than set in P 4.6.4 Warning Current
Low.

14 Above Current, High The motor current is higher than set in P 4.6.3 Warning Current
High.

236 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

15 Out of Frequency Range Output frequency is outside the frequency range.

16 Below Frequency, Low The output speed is lower than the setting inP 4.6.2 Warning
Freq. Low.

17 Above Frequency, High The output speed is higher than the setting in P 4.6.1 Warning
Freq. High.

18 Out of Feedback Range The feedback is outside the range set in P 5.2.4 Warning
Feedback Low and P 5.2.3 Warning Feedback High.

19 Below Feedback, Low The feedback is below the limit set in P 5.2.4 Warning Feedback
Low.

20 Above Feedback, High The feedback is above the limit set in P 5.2.3 Warning Feedback
High.

21 Thermal Warning The thermal warning turns on when the temperature exceeds
the limit in the motor, the frequency converter, the brake resistor,
or the thermistor.

22 Ready, No Thermal Warning The frequency converter is ready for operation, and there is no
overtemperature warning.

23 Remote, Ready, No TW The frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Remote
mode. There is no overtemperature warning.

24 Ready, No Over/under-voltage The frequency converter is ready for operation and the mains
voltage is within the specified voltage range.

25 Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run) clockwise when logic=0 and
counterclockwise when logic=1. The output changes when the
reversing signal is applied.

26 Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via the serial communication

port.

27 Torque Limit & Stop Use in performing a coast stop and in torque limit condition. If
the frequency converter has received a stop signal and is at the
torque limit, the signal is logic 0.

28 Brake, No Brake Warning The brake is active and there are no warnings.

29 Brake Ready, No Fault The brake is ready for operation and there are no faults.

30 Brake Fault (IGBT) The output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT is short-circuited. Use
this function to protect the frequency converter if there is a fault
on the brake modules. Use the output/relay to cut out the mains
voltage from the frequency converter.

32 Mech. Brake Control Enable control of an external mechanical brake.

36 Control Word Bit 11 Bit 11 in control word controls the relay.

37 Control Word Bit 12 Bit 12 in control word controls the relay.

40 Out of Ref. Range This option is active when the actual speed is outside the
settings in P 5.2.2 Warning Reference Low to P 5.2.1 Warning
Reference High.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 237

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

41 Below Reference, Low This option is active when the actual speed is below the speed
reference setting.

42 Above Refefence, High This option is active when the actual speed is above the speed
reference setting.

45 Bus Control Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. The output state is retained in
the event of fieldbus timeout.

46 Bus Control, Timeout: On Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. When bus timeout occurs, the
output state is set high (On).

47 Bus Control, Timeout: Off Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. When bus timeout occurs, the
output state is set low (Off).

55 Pulse Output Use terminal 15 as pulse output.

56 Heat Sink Cleaning Warning, High Activated when the heat sink temperature is not lower than the
calculated value. The calculated value is equal to the maximum
value of P 2.1.9 Heat Sink Temperature minus the current value of
P 2.1.9 Heat Sink Temperature.

60 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

61 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

62 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

63 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

64 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

65 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

70 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

71 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

72 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

73 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

74 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

75 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

80 SL digital output A See P 8.4.6.2 Action. The output goes high whenever the smart
logic action [38] Set digital out A high is executed. The output
goes low whenever the smart logic action [32] Set digital out A
low is executed.

81 SL digital output B See P 8.4.6.2 Action. The output goes high whenever the smart
logic action [39] Set digital out B high is executed. The output
goes low whenever the smart logic action [33] Set digital out B
low is executed.

160 No Fault The output is high when no alarm is present.

238 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

161 Running Reverse The output is high when the frequency converter is running
counterclockwise (the logical product of the status bits Running
AND Reverse).

165 Local Ref. Active The output is high when local reference is activated.

166 Remote Ref. Active The output is high when remote reference is activated.

167 Start Command Active The output is high when there is an active start command, and
no stop command is active.

168 Drive in Local Mode The output is high when the frequency converter is in Local
mode.

169 Drive in Remote Mode The output is high when the frequency converter is in Remote
mode.

193 Sleep Mode The frequency converter/system has entered sleep mode.

194 Lost Load Function A lost-load condition is detected.

P 9.4.2.3 T15 DO ON-Delay

Enter the digital output on delay time.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.00–600.00)

Parameter 534 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.2.4 T15 DO OFF-Delay

Enter the digital output Off delay time.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.00–600.00)

Parameter 535 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.2.3 Relay (Menu Index 9.4.3)

P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay

Select the function to control the output relays.

Default value: 9 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 540 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 239

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 No Operation Default for all digital outputs.

1 Control Ready The control card is ready.

2 Drive Ready The frequency converter is ready for operation and applies a
supply signal on the control board.

3 Drive Ready / Remote Mode The frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Remote
mode.

4 Stand-by / No Warning Ready for operation. No start or stop command is given (start/
disable). No warnings are active.

5 Running The motor is running and shaft torque is present.

6 Running / No Warning The motor is running and there are no warnings.

7 Run in Range / No Warning The motor is running within the programmed current and speed
ranges set in P 4.6.4 Warning Current Low to P 4.6.3 Warning
Current High. There are no warnings.

8 Run on Ref. / No Warning The motor runs at reference speed. No warnings.

9 Fault A fault activates the output.

10 Fault or Warning A fault or a warning activates the output.

11 At Torque Limit The torque limit set in P 5.10.1 Motor Torque Limit or P 5.10.2
Regenerative Torque Limit has been exceeded.

12 Out of Current Range The motor current is outside the range set inP 2.7.1 Output
Current Limit %.

13 Below Current, Low The motor current is lower than set in P 4.6.4 Warning Current
Low.

14 Above Current, High The motor current is higher than set in P 4.6.3 Warning Current
High.

15 Out of Frequency Range Output frequency is outside the frequency range.

16 Below Frequency, Low The output speed is lower than the setting inP 4.6.2 Warning
Freq. Low.

17 Above Frequency, High The output speed is higher than the setting in P 4.6.1 Warning
Freq. High.

18 Out of Feedback Range The feedback is outside the range set in P 5.2.4 Warning
Feedback Low andP 5.2.3 Warning Feedback High.

19 Below Feedback, Low The feedback is below the limit set in P 5.2.4 Warning Feedback
Low.

20 Above Feedback, High The feedback is above the limit set in P 5.2.3 Warning Feedback
High.

21 Thermal Warning The thermal warning turns on when the temperature exceeds
the limit in the motor, the frequency converter, the brake resistor,
or the thermistor.

240 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

22 Ready, No Thermal Warning The frequency converter is ready for operation, and there is no
overtemperature warning.

23 Remote, Ready, No TW The frequency converter is ready for operation and is in Remote
mode. There is no overtemperature warning.

24 Ready, No Over/under-voltage The frequency converter is ready for operation and the mains
voltage is within the specified voltage range.

25 Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run) clockwise when logic=0 and
counterclockwise when logic=1. The output changes when the
reversing signal is applied.

26 Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via the serial communication

port.

27 Torque Limit & Stop Use in performing a coast stop and in torque limit condition. If
the frequency converter has received a stop signal and is at the
torque limit, the signal is logic 0.

28 Brake, No Brake Warning The brake is active and there are no warnings.

29 Brake Ready, No Fault The brake is ready for operation and there are no faults.

30 Brake Fault (IGBT) The output is logic 1 when the brake IGBT is short-circuited. Use
this function to protect the frequency converter if there is a fault
on the brake modules. Use the output/relay to cut out the mains
voltage from the frequency converter.

32 Mech. Brake Control Enable control of an external mechanical brake.

36 Control Word Bit 11 Bit 11 in control word controls the relay.

37 Control Word Bit 12 Bit 12 in control word controls the relay.

40 Out of Ref. Range This option is active when the actual speed is outside the
settings in P 5.2.2 Warning Reference Low to P 5.2.1 Warning
Reference High.

41 Below Reference, Low This option is active when the actual speed is below the speed
reference setting.

42 Above Refefence, High This option is active when the actual speed is above the speed
reference setting.

45 Bus Control Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. The output state is retained in
the event of fieldbus timeout.

46 Bus Control, Timeout: On Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. When bus timeout occurs, the
output state is set high (On).

47 Bus Control, Timeout: Off Control output via fieldbus. The state of the output is set in P
9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control. When bus timeout occurs, the
output state is set low (Off).

55 Pulse Output Use terminal 15 as pulse output.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 241

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name Selection description

56 Heat Sink Cleaning Warning, High Activated when the heat sink temperature is not lower than the
calculated value. The calculated Value is equal to the maximum
value of P 2.1.9 Heat Sink Temperature minus the current value of
P 2.1.9 Heat Sink Temperature.

60 Comparator 0 Use result of comparator 0 in logic rule.

61 Comparator 1 Use result of comparator 1 in logic rule.

62 Comparator 2 Use result of comparator 2 in logic rule.

63 Comparator 3 Use result of comparator 3 in logic rule.

64 Comparator 4 Use result of comparator 4 in logic rule.

65 Comparator 5 Use result of comparator 5 in logic rule.

70 Logic rule 0 Use result of logic rule 0 in logic rule.

71 Logic rule 1 Use result of logic rule 1 in logic rule.

72 Logic rule 2 Use result of logic rule 2 in logic rule.

73 Logic rule 3 Use result of logic rule 3 in logic rule.

74 Logic rule 4 Use result of logic rule 4 in logic rule.

75 Logic rule 5 Use result of logic rule 5 in logic rule.

80 SL digital output A See P 8.4.6.2 Action. The output goes high whenever the smart
logic action [38] Set digital out A high is executed. The output
goes low whenever the smart logic action [32] Set digital out A
low is executed.

81 SL digital output B See P 8.4.6.2 Action. The output goes high whenever the smart
logic action [39] Set digital out B high is executed. The output
goes low whenever the smart logic action [33] Set digital out B
low is executed.

160 No Fault The output is high when no alarm is present.

161 Running Reverse The output is high when the frequency converter is running
counterclockwise (the logical product of the status bits Running
AND Reverse).

165 Local Ref. Active The output is high when local reference is activated.

166 Remote Ref. Active The output is high when remote reference is activated.

167 Start Command Active The output is high when there is an active start command, and
no stop command is active.

168 Drive in Local Mode The output is high when the frequency converter is in Local
mode.

169 Drive in Remote Mode The output is high when the frequency converter is in Remote
mode.

193 Sleep Mode The frequency converter/system has entered sleep mode.

194 Lost Load Function A lost-load condition is detected.

242 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 9.4.3.2 Relay ON-Delay

Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.00–600.00)

Parameter 541 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

e30bk137.10
Selected
event

Relay
output

P 9.4.3.2 Relay P 9.4.3.3 Relay

ON-Delay OFF-Delay

Selected
event

Relay
output

P 9.4.3.2 Relay
ON-Delay

Figure 82: On Delay, Relay

P 9.4.3.3 Relay OFF-Delay

Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time. See P 9.4.3.1 Function Relay. If the selected-event condition changes before a delay timer
expires, the relay output is unaffected.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.00–600.00)

Parameter 542 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

e30bk138.10

Selected
event

Relay
output

P 9.4.3.2 Relay P 9.4.3.3 Relay

ON-Delay OFF-Delay

Figure 83: Off Delay, Relay

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 243

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.9.2.4 T18 as Pulse Input (Menu Index 9.4.4)

The pulse input parameters are used to define an appropriate window for the impulse reference area by configuring the scaling and filter
settings for the pulse inputs. Input terminals 18 act as frequency reference inputs. Set terminal 18 (P 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input) to [32]
Pulse input.

Ref.

e30bk182.10
P 9.4.4.3
T18
High Ref./
Feedb. Value

P 9.4.4.4
T18
Low Ref./
Feedb. Value
P 9.4.4.2 T18 P 9.4.4.1 T18 Input
Low Frequency High Frequency (Hz)

Figure 84: Pulse Input

P 9.4.4.1 T18 High Frequency

Enter the high frequency corresponding to the high motor shaft speed (that is high reference value) in P 9.4.4.3 Term. 18 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

Default value: 32000 Parameter type: Range (1–32000)

Parameter 556 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint 32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.4.2 T18 Low Frequency

Enter the low frequency corresponding to the low motor shaft speed (that is low reference value) in P 9.4.4.4 Term. 18 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value.

Default value: 4 Parameter type: Range (0–31999)

Parameter 555 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.4.3 T18 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the high reference value for the motor shaft speed and the high feedback value.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 558 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.4.4 T18 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the low reference value for the motor shaft speed and the low feedback value.

244 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 557 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.4.5 T18 Pulse Filter Time Constant

Enter the pulse filter time constant. The low-pass filter reduces the influence on and dampens oscillations on the feedback signal from
the control. This is an advantage, for example, if there is a great amount on noise in the system.

Default value: 100 Parameter type: Range (1–1000)

Parameter 559 Unit: ms

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Variable duty cycle pulse signal as input

The normal pulse input has fixed 50% duty cycle. To enable variable duty cycle pulse signal as the reference, the terminal 18 must be set
for variable duty cycle pulse signal as input. P 9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input should be set as [46] Pulse PWM Input. The related parameters for
reference source P 5.5.3.x should be selected as [8] Frequency Input 18. The frequency range of pulse input is from 1 Hz to 1 kHz.

Parameter P 9.4.4.6 T18 PWM Polarity is for selecting the polarity of pulse input signal. Select [0] Positive for positive direction pulses.
Select [1] Negative for negative direction pulses. P 9.4.4.7 T18 High Duty is the duty cycle of pulse corresponding to the high reference
value in P 9.4.4.3 Term. 18 High Ref./Feedb. Value. P 9.4.4.8 T18 Low Duty is the duty cycle of pulse corresponding to the low reference
value in P 9.4.4.4 Term. 18 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

P 9.4.4.6 T18 PWM Polarity

When setting the variable duty cycle pulse signal as the reference, use this parameter to select the activated PWM polarity. Select [0]
Positive, for positive direction pulses. Select [1] Negative, for negative direction pulses.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 505 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

Selection number Selection name

0 Positive

1 Negative

P 9.4.4.7 T18 High Duty

When setting variable duty cycle pulse signal as the reference, use this parameter to enter the pulse PWM input high duty (%) that
corresponds to the high reference value in P 9.4.4.3 Term. 18 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

Default value: 5000 Parameter type: Range (100–10000)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 245

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 507 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.4.4.8 T18 Low Duty

When setting variable duty cycle pulse signal as the reference, use this parameter to enter the pulse PWM input low duty (%) that
corresponds to the low reference value in P 9.4.4.4 Term. 18 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–9900)

Parameter 506 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.2.5 T15 as Pulse Output (Menu Index 9.4.5)

P 9.4.5.1 T15 Pulse Output Variable

Select the desired output on terminal 15.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 560 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No Operation

45 Bus Control

48 Bus Control, Timeout

100 Output Frequency

101 Reference

102 Process Feedback

103 Motor Current

104 Torque Relate to Limit

105 Torque Relate to Rated

106 Power

107 Speed

109 Max Out Frequency

113 PID Clamped Output

246 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 9.4.5.2 T15 Pulse Output Max. Freq

Set the maximum frequency for terminal 15, corresponding to the output variable selected in parameter 9.4.5.1 T15 Pulse Output
Variable.

Default value: 5000 Parameter type: Range (4–32000)

Parameter 562 Unit: Hz

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.2.6 Bus Control (Menu Index 9.4.6)

P 9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control

This parameter controls the state of the digital outputs and relays that are controlled by bus. A logical 1 indicates that the output is high
or active. A logical 0 indicates that the output is low or inactive.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 590 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

Table 67: Bit Description

Bit Bit name

Bit 0 Digital Output Terminal 15

Bit 1-3 Reserved

Bit 4 Relay 1 Output Terminal

Bit 6-23 Reserved

Bit 24 Reserved

Bit 26-31 Reserved

P 9.4.6.2 T15 Pulse Out Bus Control

Set the output frequency transferred to the output terminal 15 when the terminal is configured as [45] Bus Control in P 9.4.5.1 T15 Pulse
Output Variable.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0.00–100.00)

Parameter 593 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read

P 9.4.6.3 T15 Pulse Out Timeout Preset

Set the output frequency transferred to the output terminal 15 when the terminal is configured as [48] Bus Control, Timeout in P 9.4.5.1
T15 Pulse Output Variable and a timeout is detected.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 247

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0.00–100.00)

Parameter 594 Unit: %

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.3 Analog Inputs/Outputs (Menu Index 9.5)

7.9.3.1 Output Terminal 31 (Menu Index 9.5.1)
P 9.5.1.1 T31 Mode

Set terminal 31 analog output range.

Default value: 0 [0–20 mA] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 690 Unit: –

Number

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 0–20 mA

1 4–20 mA

P 9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output

Select the function of Terminal 31.

Default value: 100 [Output Frequency] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 691 Unit: –

Number

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 No Operation

100 Output Frequency

101 Reference

102 Process Feedback

103 Motor Current

104 Torque Relate to Limit

105 Torque Relate to Rated

248 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

106 Power

107 Speed

113 PID Clamped Output

139 Bus Control

254 DC Link Voltage

P 9.5.1.3 T31 Output Max Scale

Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the analog signal at terminal 31. Set the value to be the percentage of the full range of the
variable selected in P 9.5.1.2 Terminal 31 Analog Output.

Default value: 100.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–200.00)

Parameter 694 Unit: %

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Current
e30bk139.10

(mA)

20

0/4

0% P 9.5.14 P 9.5.13 100% Variable for

T31 Output T31 Output Output
Min Scale Max Scale example: Power

Figure 85: Output Scale versus Current

P 9.5.1.4 T31 Output Min Scale

Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the analog signal at terminal 31. Set the value to be the percentage of the full range of the
variable selected in P 9.5.1.2 Terminal 31 Analog Output.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0.00–200.00)

Parameter 693 Unit: %

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.1.5 T31 Output Bus Control

Holds the analog level of Output 31 if controlled by bus.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–16384)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 249

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 696 Unit: –

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.3.2 Input Terminal 33 (Menu Index 9.5.2)

P 9.5.2.1 T33 Mode

Select the working mode of terminal 33.

Default value: 1 [Voltage Mode] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 619 Unit: –

Number

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Current Mode

1 Voltage Mode

P 9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage

Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the high reference value, as set in P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

Default value: 10.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–10.00)

Parameter 611 Unit: V

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage

Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the low reference value (set in P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb.Value). The value must be set at
>1 V in order to activate the live zero timeout function in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Default value: 0.07 Parameter type: Range (0.00–10.00)

Parameter 610 Unit: V

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.4 T33 High Current

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to the high reference value (set in P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value).

Default value: 20.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 613 Unit: mA

Number

250 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.5 T33 Low Current

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to the low reference value (set in P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb.Value). The value must be set at
>2 mA in order to activate the live zero timeout function in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Default value: 4.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 612 Unit: mA

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the reference or feedback value that corresponds to the voltage or current set in P 9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage/ P 9.5.2.4 T33 High
Current.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 615 Unit: –

Number

Data type: int 32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the reference or feedback value that corresponds to the voltage or current set in P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage / P 9.5.2.5 T33 Low
Current.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 614 Unit: –

Number

Data type: int 32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.8 T33 Filter Time Constant

Enter the filter time constant. This is a first-order digital low-pass filter time constant for suppressing electrical noise in terminal 33. A
high time constant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay through the filter.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.01–10.00)

Parameter 616 Unit: s

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.9 T33 Voltage Dead Zone Scale

A non-zero value for the parameter enables the dead-zone function. The dead-zone band defines an area which could freeze the pointed
speed reference by scaled analog input signal, or ignore unexpected vibration at desired speed caused by disturbance of reference
signal. The bandwidth of dead zone is the double value of P 9.5.2.9 T33 Voltage Dead Zone Scale.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 251

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 617 Unit: V

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.2.10 T33 Current Dead Zone Scale

A non-zero value for the parameter enables the dead-zone function. The dead-zone band defines an area which could freeze the pointed
speed reference by scaled analog input signal, or ignore unexpected vibration at desired speed caused by disturbance of reference
signal. The bandwidth of dead zone is the double value of P 9.5.2.10 T33 Current Dead Zone Scale.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–1000)

Parameter 618 Unit: mA

Number

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

Dead-zone function

l A non-zero value for the parameter Voltage/Current Dead Zone Scale enables the dead-zone function. The dead-zone band defines
an area which could freeze the pointed speed reference by scaled analog input signal, or ignore unexpected vibration at desired
speed caused by disturbance of reference signal.
l The bandwidth of dead zone is the double value of Voltage/Current Dead Zone Scale.
l Dead-zone band central point is the mid-value of High and Low value of the voltage or current.
l When Low Ref./feedb. Value is a negative value, and the parameter of AI minimum valueLow Voltage/Current set as 0, if the analog
input signal is lost (AI input value = 0), the motor runs at the value of Low Ref./feedb. Value without expectation. This would cause
uncertainty risk or danger. Therefore, the parameters of AI Low Voltage/Current should be set as a non-zero value, like 2 V or 4 mA.
l The following illustration is an example of using T33 analog input (voltage mode, from 2 V to 10 V) for dead-zone function to control
motor running between the speed from -50 Hz to 50 Hz.
e30bv140.10
Reference

P 9.5.2.9 T33 high ref. /feedb. value

(example value: 50 Hz)
Dead zone central point
(example value: 6 V)
P 9.5.2.3 T33 low voltage Dead zone band
(example value: 2 V)
(example value: 2 V)
Forward
AI
0 Hz
0V Reverse
P 9.5.2.2 T33 high voltage
(example value: 10 V)

P 9.5.2.9 Voltage dead zone scale

P 9.5.2.7 T33 low ref./feedb. value (example value: 0.5 V)
(example value: -50 Hz)

Figure 86: Dead-zone Function Example

The typcial parameter settings for the examples are shown in the following tables.

252 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 68: Data for Dead-zone Funtion Key Parameters

Parameter Data Parameter number

P 9.5.2.1 T33 Mode [1] Voltage Mode 619

P 9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 10.00 V 611

P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 2.00 V 610

P 9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 50.000 615

P 9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value -50.000 614

P 9.5.2.9 T33 Voltage Dead Zone Scale 0.5 V 617

Table 69: Data for Relevant Parameters

Parameter Data Parameter number

P 5.5.3.1 Reference Range [1] -Max~+Max 300

P 5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 50.00 303

P 5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 33 315

P 5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source [0] No function 316

P 5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source [0] No function 317

P 5.8.1 Rotation Direction [2] Both Directions 410

7.9.3.3 Input Terminal 34 (Menu Index 9.5.3)

P 9.5.3.1 T34 Mode

Select if terminal 34 is used for current or voltage input.

Default value: 1 [Voltage Mode] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 629 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Current Mode

1 Voltage Mode

P 9.5.3.2 T34 High Voltage

Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the high reference value, as set in P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

Default value: 10.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–10.00)

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 253

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 621 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.3 T34 Low Voltage

Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the low reference value (set in P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. Value). The value must be set at
>1 V in order to activate the live zero timeout function in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Default value: 0.07 Parameter type: Range (0.00–10.00)

Parameter 620 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.4 T34 High Current

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to the high reference value (set in P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. Value).

Default value: 20.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 623 Unit: mA

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.5 T34 Low Current

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to the low reference value, set in P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. The value must be set at
>2 mA in order to activate the Live Zero Timeout function in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Default value: 4.00 Parameter type: Range (0.00–20.00)

Parameter 622 Unit: mA

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the reference or feedback value that corresponds to the voltage or current set in P 9.5.3.2 T34 High Voltage or P 9.5.3.4 T34 High
Current.

Default value: Size Related Parameter number: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 625 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int 32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Enter the reference or feedback value that corresponds to the voltage or current set in parameter P 9.5.3.3 T34 High Voltage or P 9.5.3.5
T34 High Current.

Default value: 0 Parameter number: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

254 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Parameter 624 Unit: –

number:

Data type: int 32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.8 T34 Filter Time Constant

Enter the filter time constant. This is a first-order digital low-pass filter time constant for suppressing electrical noise. A high time
constant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay through the filter.

Default value: 0.01 Parameter type: Range (0.01–10.00)

Parameter 626 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.9 T34 Voltage Dead Zone Scale

A non-zero value for the parameter enables the dead-zone function. The dead-zone band defines an area which could freeze the pointed
speed reference by scaled analog input signal, or ignore unexpected vibration at desired speed caused by disturbance of reference
signal. The bandwidth of dead zone is the double value of P 9.5.3.9 T34 Voltage Dead Zone Scale.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–500)

Parameter 627 Unit: V

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.3.10 T34 Current Dead Zone Scale

A non-zero value for the parameter enables the dead-zone function. The dead-zone band defines an area which could freeze the pointed
speed reference by scaled analog input signal, or ignore unexpected vibration at desired speed caused by disturbance of reference
signal. The bandwidth of dead zone is the double value of P 9.5.3.10 T34 Current Dead Zone Scale.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–1000)

Parameter 628 Unit: mA

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.3.4 Potentiometer Reference (Menu Index 9.5.4)

P 9.5.4.1 Potentiometer High Ref.

Set the reference value to correspond to the maximum position of the control panel potentiometer.

Default value: 50.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 682 Unit: –

Number

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.4.2 Potentiometer Low Ref.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 255

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Set the reference value to correspond to the minimum position of the control panel potentiometer.

Default value: 0.000 Parameter type: Range (-4999.000–4999.000)

Parameter 681 Unit: –

Number

Data type: int32 Access type: Read/Write

7.9.3.5 Live Zero (Menu Index 9.5.6)

P 9.5.6.1 Live Zero Response

Enter the timeout time. The function set in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function is activated when the input signal on terminal is below
50% of the minimal value (for example, the minimal value for Terminal 33 voltage mode is P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage) for a time period
defined in the parameter.

Default value: 10 Parameter type: Range (1–99)

Parameter 600 Unit: s

Number

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function

Select the timeout function. The function set in the parameter is activated when the input signal on terminal is below 50% of the
minimal value (for example, the minimal value for Terminal 33 voltage mode is P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage) for a time period defined in P
9.5.6.1 Live Zero Response.

Default value: 0 [Off] Parameter type Selection

Parameter 601 Unit: –

Number

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Off

1 Freeze Output

2 Stop

3 Jogging

4 Max Speed

5 Stop and Trip

256 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.10 Connectivity (Menu Index 10)

7.10.1 FC Port Settings (Menu Index 10.1)
P 10.1.1 Protocol

Select the protocol for the integrated RS485 port.

Default value: 0 [FC] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 830 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name Selection description

0 FC Communication according to the FC protocol.

2 Modbus RTU Communication according to the Modbus RTU protocol.

P 10.1.2 Address

Enter the address for the RS485 port. Valid range: 1-126 for FC-bus or 1-247 for Modbus.

Default value: 1 Parameter type: (0–247)

Parameter 831 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint8 Access type: Read/Write

P 10.1.3 Baud Rate

Select the baud rate for the RS485 port..

Default value: 2 [9600] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 832 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 2400 Baud

1 4800 Baud

2 9600 Baud

3 19200 Baud

4 38400 Baud

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 257

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Selection number Selection name

5 57600 Baud

6 76800 Baud

7 115200 Baud

P 10.1.4 Parity/Stop Bits

Parity and stop bits for the protocol using the FC port. For some of the protocols, not all options are available.

Default value: 0 [Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit] Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 833 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit

1 Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit

2 No Parity, 1 Stop Bit

3 No Parity, 2 Stop Bits

P 10.1.5 Maximum Response Delay

Specify the maximum allowed delay time between receiving a request and transmitting the response. If this time is exceeded, no
response will be returned.

Default value: Size Related Parameter type: Range (0.100–10.000)

Parameter 836 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

P 10.1.6 Minimum Response Delay

Specify the minimum delay time between receiving a request and transmitting a response. This is used for overcoming modem
turnaround delays.

Default value: 0.010 Parameter type: Range (1–500)

Parameter 835 Unit: s

number:

Data type: uint16 Access type: Read/Write

258 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

7.10.2 FC Port Diagnostics (Menu Index 10.2)

P 10.2.1 Bus Message Count

This parameter shows the number of valid telegrams detected on the bus.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 880 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 10.2.1 Bus Error Count

This parameter shows the number of telegrams with faults (for example, CRC fault), detected on the bus.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 881 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 10.2.3 Slave Messaged Rcvd

This parameter shows the number of valid telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the frequency converter.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 882 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 10.2.4 Slave Error Count

This parameter shows the number of valid telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the frequency converter.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 883 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 10.2.5 Slave Messages Sent

This parameter shows the number of messages sent from the slave.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 884 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 259

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

P 10.2.6 Slave Timeout Errors

This parameter shows the number of slave timeout errors.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Range (0–4294967295)

Parameter 885 Unit: –

number:

Data type: uint32 Access type: Read

P 10.2.7 Reset FC Port Diagnostics

Reset all FC port diagnostic counters.

Default value: 0 Parameter type: Selection

Parameter 888 Unit: –

number:

Data type: enum Access type: Read/Write

The following are the selections for the parameter.

Selection number Selection name

0 Do not reset

1 Reset counter

260 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Introduction
When the drive fault circuitry detects a fault condition or a pending fault, an event that occurs in the drive is signaled by LED indicators
on the control panel. The event types in iC2-Micro Frequency Converters include warning or fault.

8.2 Faults
A fault causes the drive to trip (suspend operation). The drive has 3 trip conditions, which are shown in line 1.

Trip (auto restart)

The drive is configured to restart automatically after the fault is removed. The number of automatic reset attempts can be continuous
or limited to a programmed number of attempts. If the selected number of automatic reset attempts is exceeded, the trip condition
changes to trip (reset).

Trip (reset)
Requires resetting of the drive before operation after a fault is cleared. To reset the drive manually, press Stop/Reset button or use a
digital input, or a fieldbus command.

Trip lock (disc>mains)

Disconnect the mains AC input power to the drive long enough for the display to go blank. Remove the fault condition and reapply
power. Following power-up, the fault indication changes to trip (reset) and allows for manual, digital, or fieldbus reset.

8.3 Warnings
During a warning, the drive remains operational, although the warning flashes for as long as the condition exists. The drive could,
however, reduce the warning condition. For example, if the warning shown was warning 12, Torque Limit, the drive would reduce speed
to compensate for the overcurrent condition. Sometimes, if the condition is not corrected or worsens, an fault condition is activated and
the drive stops output to the motor terminals.

8.4 Warning/Fault Messages

The LEDs on the front of the drive and a code in the display signal a warning or an fault.

Table 70: LED Indication

WARN Steadily lit when a warning occurs.

READY Steadily lit when the drive is ready.

FAULT Flashes when a fault occurs.

A warning indicates a condition that requires attention, or a trend that would eventually require attention. A warning remains active until
the cause is no longer present. Under some circumstances, motor operation could continue.

An fault triggers a trip. The trip removes power to the motor. It can be reset after the condition has been cleared by pressing Stop/Reset
button, or through a digital input (See P 9.4.1 Digital Input Setting). The event that caused an fault cannot damage the drive, or cause a
dangerous condition. Faults must be reset to restart operation once their cause has been rectified.

The reset can be done in 3 ways:

l Press Stop/Reset button.

l A digital reset input.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 261

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

l Serial communication/optional fieldbus reset signal.

NOTICE
After a manual reset pressing Stop/Reset button, press Start button to restart the motor.

A warning precedes a fault.

A trip lock is an action when an fault occurs, which can damage the drive or connected equipment. Power is removed from the motor.
A trip lock can only be reset after a power cycle has cleared the condition. Once the problem has been rectified, only the fault continues
flashing until the drive is reset.

The fault words, warning words, and extended status words can be accessed via fieldbus or optional fieldbus for diagnosis.

8.5 Warning and Fault Events

Table 71: Warning and Fault Events Summary

Number Description Warning Fault Trip Cause

lock

2 Live Zero Error X X – Signal on terminal 33 or 34 is less than 50% of the value set in
P 9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage, P 9.5.2.5 T33 Low Current, P 9.5.3.3
T34 Low Voltage, and P 9.5.3.5 T34 Low Current.

3 No Motor X X – No motor has been connected to the output of the drive.

4 Mains Phase Loss(1) X X X Missing phase on the supply side, or the voltage imbalance is
(1)
too high. Check the supply voltage.

7 DC Over Voltage(1) X X – DC-link voltage exceeds the limit.

8 DC Under Voltage(1) X X – DC-link voltage drops below the voltage warning low limit.

9 Inverter Overloaded X X – More than 100% load for too long.

10 Motor ETR Overtem- X X – Motor is too hot due to more than 100% load for too long.
perature

11 Motor Thermistor X X – Thermistor or thermistor connection is disconnected, or the

Overtemperature motor is too hot.

12 Torque Limit X X – Torque exceeds the value set in either P 5.10.1 Motor Torque
Limit or P 5.10.2 Regenerative Torque Limit.

13 Over Current X X X Inverter peak current limit is exceeded. If this fault occurs on
power-up, check whether power cables are mistakenly con-
nected to the motor terminals.

14 Earth Fault X X X Discharge from output phases to ground.

16 Short Circuit – X X Short circuit in motor or on motor terminals.

17 Control Word Timeout X X – No communication to the drive.

18 Start Failed – X – May be caused by a blocked motor.

25 Brake Resistor Short – X X Brake resistor is short-circuited, thus the brake function is dis-
connected.

262 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 71: Warning and Fault Events Summary (continued)

Number Description Warning Fault Trip Cause

lock

26 Brake Overload X X – The power transmitted to the brake resistor over the last 120 s
exceeds the limit. Possible corrections: Decrease brake energy
via lower speed or longer ramp time.

27 Brake IGBT/Brake – X X Brake transistor is short-circuited, thus brake function is dis-

chopper Short Cir- connected.
cuited

28 Brake Check – X X Brake resistor is not connected/working.

30 U phase loss – X X Motor phase U is missing. Check the phase.

31 V phase loss – X X Motor phase V is missing. Check the phase.

32 W phase loss – X X Motor phase W is missing. Check the phase.

36 Mains Failure X X – This warning/fault is only active if the supply voltage to the
drive is less than the value set in P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller
Limit, and P 2.3.6 Power Loss Action is NOT set to [0] No Func-
tion.

38 Internal Fault – X X Contact the local supplier.

40 Overload T15 X – – Check the load connected to terminal 15 or remove short-cir-

cuit connection.

46 Gate drive Voltage – X X –

Fault

47 24 V Supply Low X X X 24 V DC may be overloaded.

50 AMA calibration failed – X – A calibration error has occurred.

51 AMA check Unom and – X – Wrong setting for motor voltage and/or motor current.
Inom

52 AMA low Inom – X – Motor current is too low. Check the settings.

53 AMA big motor – X – The power size of the motor is too large for the AMA to oper-
ate.

54 AMA small motor – X – The power size of the motor is too small for the AMA to oper-
ate.

55 AMA parameter range – X – The parameter values of the motor are outside of the accept-
able range. AMA does not run.

56 AMA interrupt – X – The AMA is interrupted.

57 AMA timeout – X – –

58 AMA internal – X – Contact the local supplier.

59 Current Limit X X – The drive is overloaded.

60 External Interlock – X – External interlock has been activated.

61 Feedback Error X X – –

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 263

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 71: Warning and Fault Events Summary (continued)

Number Description Warning Fault Trip Cause

lock

63 Mechanical Brake Low – X – Actual motor current has not exceeded release brake current
within start delay time window.

69 Power Card Temp X X X The cutout temperature of the power card has exceeded the
upper limit.

80 Drive Initialized – X – All parameter settings are initialized to default settings.

87 Auto DC brake X – – Occurs in IT mains when the drive coasts, and the DC voltage
is higher than 830 V for 400 V units and 425 V for 200 V units.
The motor consumes energy on the DC link. This function can
be enabled/disabled in P 2.3.13 Auto DC Braking.

95 Lost load detected X X – –

99 Locked Rotor – X – Rotor is blocked.

126 Motor Rotating – X – PM motor is rotating when AMA is performed.

127 Back EMF too High X – – The back EMF of PM motor is too high before starting.

Err. 89 Parameter read only – – – Parameters cannot be changed.

Err. 95 Not while running – – – Parameters can only be changed when the motor is stopped.

Err. 96 A wrong password – – – Occurs when using a wrong password for changing a pass-
was entered word-protected parameter.

1) These faults may be caused by mains distortions. Installing a line filter may rectify this problem.

8.6 Fault Words, Warning Words, and Extended Status Words

For diagnosis, read out the fault words, warning words, and extended status words.

Table 72: Description of Fault Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Fault word Fault word Fault word Warning Warning Extended Extended
2 3 word word 2 status status
word word 2

0 00000001 1 Brake Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ramping Off

check

1 00000002 2 Pwr. card Gate drive Reserved Pwr. card Reserved AMA tun- Local/Re-
temp voltage temp ing mote
fault

2 00000004 4 Earth fault Reserved Reserved Earth Fault Reserved Start CW/ Reserved
CCW

3 00000008 8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Slowdown Reserved

4 00000010 16 Ctrl. word Reserved Reserved Ctrl. word Reserved Catchup Reserved
TO TO

264 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 72: Description of Fault Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word (continued)

Bit Hex Dec Fault word Fault word Fault word Warning Warning Extended Extended
2 3 word word 2 status status
word word 2

5 00000020 32 Overcur- Reserved Reserved Overcur- Reserved Feedback Reserved

rent rent high

6 00000040 64 Torque Reserved Reserved Torque Reserved Feedback Reserved

limit limit low

7 00000080 128 Motor Th. Reserved Reserved Motor Th. Reserved Output Control
over over current ready
high

8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Lost Load No Motor Motor ETR Lost Load Output Drive
over over current ready
low

9 00000200 512 Inverter Reserved Reserved Inverter Reserved Output Quick stop
overld. overld. freq. high

10 00000400 1024 DC under- Start failed Reserved DC under- Reserved Output DC brake
volt. volt. freq. low

11 00000800 2048 DC over- Reserved Reserved DC over- Reserved Brake Stop

volt. volt. check OK

12 00001000 4096 Short cir- External in- Reserved Reserved Reserved Braking Reserved
cuit terlock max

13 00002000 8192 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Braking Reserved

14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Reserved Reserved Mains ph. Reserved Reserved Freeze out-
loss loss put

15 00008000 32768 AMA not Reserved Reserved No motor Auto DC OVC active Reserved
OK braking

16 00010000 65536 Live zero Earth Fault Reserved Live zero Reserved AC brake Jog
error DESAT error

17 00020000 131072 Internal Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

fault

18 00040000 262144 Brake over- Reserved Reserved Brake resis- Reserved Reserved Start
load tor power
limit

19 00080000 524288 U phase Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reference Reserved

loss high

20 00100000 1048576 V phase Reserved Reserved Reserved Overload Reference Start delay
loss T27 low

21 00200000 2097152 W phase Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

loss

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 265

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Table 72: Description of Fault Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word (continued)

Bit Hex Dec Fault word Fault word Fault word Warning Warning Extended Extended
2 3 word word 2 status status
word word 2

22 00400000 4194304 Reserved Locked ro- Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
tor

23 00800000 8388608 24 V sup- Reserved Reserved 24 V sup- Reserved Reserved Running

ply low ply low

24 01000000 16777216 Mains fail- Reserved Reserved Mains fail- Reserved Reserved Reserved
ure ure

25 02000000 33554432 Reserved Current Reserved Current Reserved Reserved Reserved

limit limit

26 04000000 67108864 Brake resis- Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
tor

27 08000000 134217728 Brake Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

IGBT/Brake
Chopper
Start

28 10000000 268435456 Reserved Feedback Reserved Feedback Reserved Reserved FlyStart ac-
error Error tive

29 20000000 536870912 Drive ini- Reserved Reserved Reserved Back EMF Reserved Heat sink
tialized too high clean
warning

30 40000000 107374182 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

4

31 80000000 214748364 Mech. Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Database Reserved

8 brake low busy

8.7 List of Faults and Warnings

WARNING/FAULT 2, Live Zero Error
Cause

This warning or fault only appears if programmed in P 9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on 1 of the analog inputs is less than
50% of the minimum value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or a faulty device sending the signal can cause this condition.

Troubleshooting

l Check connections on all the analog input terminals. Control card terminals 33 and 34 for signals, terminal 35 common.
l Check that the drive programming and switch settings match the analog signal type.
l Perform an input terminal signal test.

266 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

WARNING/FAULT 4, Mains Phase Loss

Cause

A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears for a fault in the input
rectifier. Options are programmed in P 1.3.1 Mains Imbalance Function.

Troubleshooting

l Check the supply voltage and supply currents to the drive.

WARNING/FAULT 7, DC Overvoltage
Cause

If the DC-link voltage exceeds the limit, the drive trips after a time.

Troubleshooting

l Extend the ramp time.

l Change the ramp type.

WARNING/FAULT 8, DC Under Voltage

Cause

If the DC-link voltage (DC) drops below the undervoltage limit, the drive trips after a fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.

Troubleshooting

l Check that the supply voltage matches the drive voltage.

l Perform the input voltage test.
l Perform the soft charge circuit test.

WARNING/FAULT 9, Inverter Overload

Cause

The drive is about to cut out because of an overload (too high current for too long). The counter for electronic, thermal inverter
protection issues a warning at 90% and trips at 100%, while giving a FAULT. The drive cannot be reset until the counter is below 0%.

The fault occurs when the drive has run with more than 100% overload for too long.

Troubleshooting

l Compare the output current shown on the control panel with the drive rated current.
l Compare the output current shown on the control panel with measured motor current.
l Show the thermal drive load on the control panel and monitor the value. When running above the drive continuous current rating,
the counter increases. When running below the drive continuous current rating, the counter decreases.

WARNING/FAULT 10, Motor Overload Temperature

Cause

According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the motor is too hot. Select whether the drive issues a warning or an alarm when
the counter reaches 100% in P 4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault occurs when the motor runs with more than 100% overload for
too long.

Troubleshooting

l Check if the motor is overheating.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 267

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

l Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.

l Check that the motor current set in P 4.2.2.3 Nominal Current is correct.
l Ensure that the motor data in P 4.2.2.1 Nominal Power to P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed is set correctly.
l Running AMA in P 4.2.1.3 AMA Mode tunes the drive to the motor more accurately and reduces thermal loading.

WARNING/FAULT 11, Motor Thermistor Overtemp

Cause

Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select whether the drive issues a warning or an fault in P 4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection.

Troubleshooting

l Check for motor overheating.

l Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
l When using terminal 33 or 34, check that the thermistor is connected correctly between either terminal 33 or 34 (analog voltage
input) and terminal 32 (+10 V supply). Also check that the terminal switch for 33 or 34 is set for voltage. Check that P 4.6.8
Thermistor Resource selects terminal 33 or 34.
l When using terminal 13, 14, or 18 (digital inputs), check that the thermistor is connected correctly between the digital input
terminal used (digital input PNP only) and terminal 32. Select the terminal to use in P 4.6.8 Thermistor Resource.

WARNING/FAULT 12, Torque Limit

Cause

The torque has exceeded the value in P 5.10.1 Motor Torque Limit or the value in P 5.10.2 Regenerative Torque Limit. P 5.10.6 Trip Delay
at Torque Limit can change this warning from a warning-only condition to a warning followed by an fault.

Troubleshooting

l If the motor torque limit is exceeded during ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
l If the generator torque limit is exceeded during ramp-down time, extend the ramp-down time.
l If torque limit occurs while running, increase the torque limit. Make sure that the system can operate safely at a higher torque.
l Check the application for excessive current draw on the motor.

WARNING/FAULT 13, Overcurrent

Cause

The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 5 s, then the drive trips
and issues an fault. Shock loading or fast acceleration with high-inertia loads can cause this fault.

Troubleshooting

l Remove power and check if the motor shaft can be turned.

l Check that the motor size matches the drive.
l Check P 4.2.2.1 Nominal Power to P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed for correct motor data.

FAULT 14, Earth (Ground) Fault

Cause

There is a discharge from the output phases to ground, either in the cable between the drive and the motor or in the motor itself.

Troubleshooting

l Turn off the drive and remove the ground fault.

l Measure the resistance to ground the motor cables and the motor with a megohmmeter to check for ground faults in the motor.

268 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

FAULT 16, Short Circuit

Cause

There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.

Troubleshooting

l
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
AC drives contain high voltage when connected to AC mains input, DC supply, or load sharing. Failure to
perform installation, start-up, and maintenance by qualified personnel can result in death or serious injury.
l Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform installation, start-up, and maintenance.

Disconnect power before proceeding.

l Remove the power to the drive and repair the short circuit.

WARNING/FAULT 17, Control Word Timeout

Cause

There is no communication to the drive. The warning is only active when P 5.2.16 Watchdog Response is NOT set to [0] Off. If P 5.2.16
Watchdog Response is set to [5] Stop and trip, a warning appears, and the drive ramps down to a stop and shows an fault.

Troubleshooting

l Check the connections on the serial communication cable.

l Increase P 5.2.17 Watchdog Delay.
l Check the operation of the communication equipment.
l Verify that proper EMC installation was performed.

FAULT 18, Start Falied

Cause

The speed cannot exceed the value set in P 5.6.7 Start Max Speed [Hz] during start within the start time which is set in P 5.6.8 Start Max
Time to Trip. The fault may be caused by a blocked motor.

Troubleshooting

l Check if the motor is blocked.

l Check if the start max speed is set higher than the working speed after ramp up.
l Check if the start max time to trip is set shorter than the normal ramp up time.

FAULT 25, Brake Resistor Short Circuit

Cause

The brake resistor is monitored during start-up. If a short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the fault appears. The drive is
tripped.

Troubleshooting

l Remove the power to the drive and check the connection of the brake resistor.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 269

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

WARNING/FAULT 26, Brake Resistor Power Limit

Cause

The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The calculation is based on the
DC-link voltage and the brake resistor value set in P 3.3.2 Brake Resistor Value. The warning is active when the dissipated braking power
is higher than the value set in P 3.3.3 Brake Resistor Power Limit. The drive trips if the warning persists for 1200 s.

Troubleshooting

l Decrease brake energy via lower speed or longer ramp time.

FAULT 27, Brake IGBT/Brake Chopper Short Circuited

Cause

The brake transistor is monitored during start-up. If a short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled, and an fault is issued. The drive
is tripped.

Troubleshooting

l Remove the power to the drive and remove the brake resistor.

FAULT 28, Brake Check

Cause

The brake resistor is not connected or not working.

Troubleshooting

l Check if the brake resistor is connected or it is too large for the drive.

FAULT 30, Motor Phase U Missing

Cause

Motor phase U between the drive and the motor is missing.

Troubleshooting

l Turn off the drive and check motor phase U.

FAULT 31, Motor Phase V Missing

Cause

Motor phase V between the drive and the motor is missing.

Troubleshooting

l Turn off the drive and check motor phase V.

FAULT 32, Motor Phase W Missing

Cause

Motor phase W between the drive and the motor is missing.

Troubleshooting

l Turn off the drive and check motor phase W.

270 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

WARNING/FAULT 36, Mains Failure

Cause

This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to the drive is lost and P 2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit is not set to [0] No
Function.

Troubleshooting

l Check the fuses to the drive and mains supply to the unit.

FAULT 38, Internal Fault

Cause

When an internal fault occurs, a code number is shown.

Troubleshooting

l See Table 73 for the causes and solutions for different internal faults. If the fault persists, contact the Danfoss supplier or service
department for assistance.

Table 73: Internal Fault List

Fault number Cause Solution

140-142 Power board EEPROM data error. Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.

176 The firmware in the drive does not Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.
match the drive.

256 Flash ROM checksum error. Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.

2304 Firmware mismatch between the control Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.
card and the power card.

2560 Communication error between the con- Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.
trol card and the power card. If the fault occurs again, check the connection between
the control card and the power card.

3840 Serial flash version error. Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.

4608 Drive power size error. Upgrade the software in the drive to the latest version.
If the fault occurs again, contact a Danfoss supplier.

Other Other internal faults. Power cycle the drive. If the fault occurs again, contact
a Danfoss supplier.

WARNING 40, Overload of Digital Output Terminal 15

Troubleshooting

l Check the load connected to terminal 15 or remove the short-circuit connection.

l Check P 9.4.1.1 Digital I/O Mode and P 9.4.2.1 T 15 Mode.

FAULT 46, Gate Drive Voltage

Cause

The supply for the gate drive on the power card is out of range. It is generated by the switch mode supply (SMPS) on the power card.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 271

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Troubleshooting

l Check for a defective power card.

WARNING/FAULT 47, 24 V Supply Low

Cause

The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. This alarm appears when the detected voltage of terminal 12 is lower than 18 V.

Troubleshooting

l Check for a defective control card.

FAULT 50, AMA Calibration Failed

Troubleshooting

l Contact the Danfoss supplier or service department.

FAULT 51, AMA Check Unom and Inom

Cause

The settings for motor voltage, motor current, and motor power are wrong.

Troubleshooting

l Check settings in P 4.2.2.1 Nominal Power to P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed.

FAULT 52, AMA Low Inom

Cause

The motor current is too low.

Troubleshooting

l Check the settings in parameter 1-24 Motor Current.

FAULT 53, AMA Big Motor

Cause

The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.

FAULT 54, AMA Small Motor

Cause

The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.

FAULT 55, AMA Parameter Range

Cause

The AMA cannot run because the paramenter values of the motor are out of the acceptable range.

FAULT 56, AMA Interrupt

Cause

The AMA is manually interrupted.

272 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

FAULT 57, AMA Timeout

Troubleshooting

l Try to restart the AMA. Repeated restarts can overheat the motor.

FAULT 58, AMA Internal

Troubleshooting

l Contact the Danfoss supplier.

WARNING/FAULT 59, Current Limit

Cause

The current is higher than the value in P 2.7.1 Output Current Limit %.

Troubleshooting

l Ensure that the motor data in P 4.2.2.1 Nominal Power to P 4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed is set correctly.
l Increase the current limit if necessary. Ensure that the system can operate safely at a higher limit.

FAULT 60, External Interlock

Cause

A digital input signal indicates a fault condition external to the drive. An external interlock has commanded the drive to trip.

Troubleshooting

l Clear the external fault condition.

l To resume normal operation, apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external interlock.
l Reset the drive.

FAULT 63, Mechanical Brake Low

Cause

The actual motor current has not exceeded the release brake current within the start delay time window.

WARNING/FAULT 69, Power Card Temperature

Cause

The cutout temperature of the power card has exceeded the upper limit.

Troubleshooting

l Check that the ambient operating temperature is within limits.

l Check the fan operation.
l Check the power card.

FAULT 80, Drive Initialized to Default Value

Cause

Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a manual reset.

Troubleshooting

l To clear the fault, reset the unit.

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 273

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

WARNING 87, Auto DC-Braking

Cause

Occurs in IT mains when the drive coasts, and the DC voltage is higher than 830 V for 400 V units and 425 V for 200 V units. The motor
consumes energy on the DC link. This function can be enabled/disabled in P 2.3.13 Auto DC Braking.

WARNING/FAULT 95, Lost Load Detected

Cause

Torque is below the torque level set for no load, indicating a lost load detection. P 5.2.9 Lost Load Function is set for alarm.

Troubleshooting

l Troubleshoot the system.

l Reset the drive after the fault is cleared.

FAULT 99, Locked Rotor

Cause

The rotor is blocked. It is only enabled for PM motor control.

Troubleshooting

l Check if the motor shaft is locked.

l Check if the start current triggers the current limit set in P 2.1.5 Output Current Limit %.
l Check if it increases the value in P 4.6.15 Sync. Locked Rotor Detection Time [s].

FAULT 126, Motor Rotating

Cause

During AMA start-up, the motor is rotating. It is only valid for PM motor.

Troubleshooting

l Check if the motor is rotating before starting the AMA.

WARNING 127, Back EMF Too High

Cause

This warning applies to PM motors only. When the back EMF exceeds 90% x Uinvmax (overvoltage threshold) and does not drop to normal
level within 5 s, this warning is reported. The warning remains until the back EMF returns to a normal level.

274 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

9 Appendix
9.1 Parameter Lists

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

1 Grid

1.2 Grid Settings

1.2.1 Regional Settings 3 enum

1.2.2 Grid Type 6 enum

1.3 Grid Protection

1.3.1 Mains Imbalance Action 1412 enum

2 Power conversion & DC-link

2.1 Status

2.1.1 DC-Link Voltage 1630 uint32

2.1.2 Inverter Thermal 1635 uint8

2.1.3 Unit Nominal Current 1636 uint16

2.1.5 Output Current Limit % 1637 uint16

2.1.9 Heat sink Temperature 1634 int8

2.1.10 Real-time Switching Frequency 1866 int8

2.3 Protection

2.3.1 Overvoltage Controller Enable 217 enum

2.3.2 Overvoltage Controller Kp 219 uint16

2.3.6 Power Loss Action 1410 enum

2.3.7 Power Loss Controller Limit 1411 uint16

2.3.8 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level 1415 uint32

2.3.9 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level 1417 uint16

2.3.10 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min Power 1418 uint16

2.3.13 Auto DC Braking 7 enum

2.3.14 Max Output Frequency 419 uint16

2.3.15 Action At Inverter Fault 1427 enum

2.3.16 Function at Inverter Overload 1461 enum

2.3.17 Adjustable Temperature Warning 442 uint8

2.4 Modulation

2.4.2 Min. Switching Frequency 1463 enum

2.4.3 Switching Frequency 1401 enum

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 275

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

2.4.5 Over Modulation 1403 enum

2.5 DC-Link Control

2.5.1 Damping Gain Factor 1408 uint8

2.5.2 DC-Link Voltage Compensation 1451 enum

2.7 Output Current Limit

2.7.1 Output Current Limit % 418 uint16

2.7.2 Current Limit Kp 1430 uint16

2.7.3 Current Limit Ti 1431 uint16

2.7.4 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 1432 uint16

2.7.5 Trip Delay at Current Limit 1424 uint8

3 Filters & Brake Chopper

3.1 Status

3.1.1 Brake Energy 1633 uint32

3.2 Brake Chopper

3.2.1 Enable Brake Chopper 215 enum

3.2.2 Brake Chopper Voltage Reduce 214 uint16

3.3 Brake Resistor

3.3.2 Brake Resistor Value 211 uint16

3.3.3 Brake Resistor Power Limit 212 uint32

4 Motor

4.1 Status

4.1.1 Motor Current 1614 uint16

4.1.2 Motor Voltage 1612 uint32

4.1.3 Motor Electrical Power 1610 uint32

4.1.4 Motor Power hp 1611 uint32

4.1.5 Motor Thermal Load 1618 uint8

4.1.6 Frequency 1613 uint32

4.1.7 Frequency % 1615 uint16

4.1.8 Motor Shaft Speed 1617 int32

4.1.10 Motor Torque 1616 int32

4.1.11 Motor Torque % 1622 int16

4.2 Motor Data

4.2.1 General Setting

276 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

4.2.1.1 Motor Type 110 enum

4.2.1.2 Number of Poles 139 uint8

4.2.1.3 AMA Mode 129 enum

4.2.1.4 Motor Cable Length 142 uint8

4.2.1.5 Motor Cable Length Feet 143 uint16

4.2.2 Nameplate Data

4.2.2.1 Nominal Power 120 uint16

4.2.2.2 Nominal Voltage 122 uint16

4.2.2.3 Nominal Current 124 uint32

4.2.2.4 Nominal Frequency 123 uint16

4.2.2.5 Nominal Speed 125 uint16

4.2.3 Asyn. Induction Motor

4.2.3.1 Stator Resistance Rs 130 uint32

4.2.3.2 Rotor Resistance Rr 131 uint32

4.2.3.4 Stator Leakage Inductance Lls 133 uint32

4.2.3.6 Magnetizing Inductance Lm 135 uint32

4.2.3.7 Motor Cont. Rated Torque 126 uint32

4.2.4 Permanent Magnet Motor

4.2.4.1 Back EMF 140 uint16

4.2.4.3 d-axis Inductance Ld 137 int32

4.2.4.4 d-axis Inductance LdSat 144 int32

4.2.4.6 Ld Current Point 148 int16

4.2.4.7 q-axis Inductance Lq 138 int32

4.2.4.8 q-axis Inductance LqSat 145 int32

4.2.4.10 Lq Current Point 149 uint16

4.4 Motor Control

4.4.1 General Settings

4.4.1.2 AEO Minimum Magnetization 1441 uint8

4.4.1.3 Torque Characteristic 103 enum

4.4.1.4 Clockwise Direction 106 enum

4.4.1.5 Motor Control Bandwidth 108 enum

4.4.2 AC-Brake

4.4.2.1 Enable AC-Brake 210 enum

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 277

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

4.4.2.2 AC Brake, Max current 216 uint16

4.4.2.3 AC-Brake Voltage Control Kp 188 uint16

4.4.3 U/F Curve

4.4.3.1 Voltage Point 155 uint16

4.4.3.2 Frequency Point 156 uint16

4.4.4 Dependent Setting

4.4.4.1 Slip Comp. Gain 162 int16

4.4.4.2 Slip Comp. Time Constant 163 uint16

4.4.4.3 High Speed Load Comp. 161 int16

4.4.4.4 Low Speed Load Comp. 160 int16

4.4.4.5 Res. Damp Gain 164 uint16

4.4.4.6 Res. Damp High Pass Time Constant 165 uint16

4.4.4.7 Damping Gain 114 int16

4.4.4.8 High Speed Filter Time Const. 116 uint16

4.4.4.9 Low Speed Filter Time Const. 115 uint16

4.4.4.10 Voltage Filter Time Const. 117 uint16

4.4.4.11 Variable Torque Zero Speed Magne- 150 uint16

tization

4.4.4.12 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing 152 uint16

[Hz]

4.4.4.13 VT Level 1440 uint8

4.4.4.14 Min. Current at Low Speed 166 uint32

4.4.5 Dead Time Compensation

4.4.5.1 Dead Time Compensation Level 1407 uint8

4.4.5.2 Dead Time Bias Current Level 1409 uint8

4.4.5.3 Dead Time Compensation Zero Cur- 1464 enum

rent Level

4.4.5.4 Speed Derate Dead Time Compen- 1465 uint16

sation

4.6 Protection

4.6.1 Warning Freq. High 441 uint16

4.6.2 Warning Freq. Low 440 uint16

4.6.3 Warning Current High 451 uint32

4.6.4 Warning Current Low 450 uint32

278 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

4.6.7 Motor Thermal Protection 190 enum

4.6.8 Thermistor Source 193 enum

4.6.9 Motor External Fan 191 enum

4.6.12 Missing Motor Phase Function 458 enum

4.6.13 Fault Level 1490 enum

4.6.14 Sync. Locked Rotor Protection 3022 enum

4.6.15 Sync. Locked Rotor Detection Time 3023 uint8

[s]

5 Application

5.1 Status

5.1.1 Fault Word 1 1690 uint32

5.1.2 Fault Word 2 1691 uint32

5.1.3 Fault Word 3 1697 uint32

5.1.4 Warning Word 1 1692 uint32

5.1.5 Warning Word 2 1693 uint32

5.1.6 Warning Word 3 1698 uint32

5.1.7 Active Control Word 1600 uint16

5.1.8 Drive Status Word 1603 uint16

5.1.9 Ext. Status Word 1694 uint32

5.1.10 Ext. Status Word 2 1695 uint32

5.1.16 Reference [Unit] 1601 int32

5.1.17 Reference [%] 1602 int16

5.1.18 External Reference 1650 int16

5.1.19 Main Actual Value [%] 1605 int16

5.1.26 FC Port CTW 1 1685 uint16

5.1.27 FC Port REF 1 1686 int16

5.2 Protection

5.2.1 Warning Reference High 455 int32

5.2.2 Warning Reference Low 454 int32

5.2.3 Warning Feedback High 457 int32

5.2.4 Warning Feedback Low 456 int32

5.2.9 Lost Load Function 2260 enum

5.2.10 Lost Load Detection Torque Level 2261 uint8

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 279

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

5.2.11 Lost Load Detection Delay 2262 uint16

5.2.16 Watchdog Response 804 enum

5.2.17 Watchdog Delay 803 uint16

5.4 Operation Mode

5.4.1 Application Selection 16 enum

5.4.2 Operation Mode 100 enum

5.4.3 Motor Control Principle 101 enum

5.5 Control

5.5.1 General Setting

5.5.1.1 Control Place Selection 801 enum

5.5.1.2 Control Source 802 enum

5.5.1.6 Configurable Status Word STW 813 enum

5.5.1.7 Configurable Control Word CTW 814 enum

5.5.1.10 Operating State at Power-up 4 enum

5.5.1.15 [REM/LOC] Button 46 enum

5.5.1.16 [Off/Reset] Button 44 enum

5.5.2 Digital/Bus

5.5.2.1 Coasting Select 850 enum

5.5.2.2 Quick Stop Select 851 enum

5.5.2.3 DC Brake Select 852 enum

5.5.2.4 Start Select 853 enum

5.5.2.5 Reversing Select 854 enum

5.5.2.6 Set-up Select 855 enum

5.5.2.7 Preset Reference Select 856 enum

5.5.3 Reference

5.5.3.1 Reference Range 300 enum

5.5.3.2 Reference/Feedback Unit 301 enum

5.5.3.3 Reference Maximum 303 int32

5.5.3.4 Reference Minimum 302 int32

5.5.3.5 Reference Function 304 enum

5.5.3.6 Reference Site 313 enum

5.5.3.7 Reference 1 Source 315 enum

5.5.3.8 Reference 2 Source 316 enum

280 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

5.5.3.9 Reference 3 Source 317 enum

5.5.3.10 Preset Reference 310 int16

5.5.3.11 Preset Relative Reference 314 int16

5.5.3.12 Relative Scaling Reference Resource 318 enum

5.5.3.13 Freeze Up/Down Step Delta 312 int16

5.5.3.20 Enable Potentiometer 45 enum

5.5.4 Ramp

5.5.4.1 Ramp 1 Type Selector 340 enum

5.5.4.2 Ramp 1 Accel. Time 341 uint32

5.5.4.3 Ramp 1 Decel. Time 342 uint32

5.5.4.8 Ramp 2 Type Selector 350 enum

5.5.4.9 Ramp 2 Accel. Time 351 uint32

5.5.4.10 Ramp 2 Decel. Time 352 uint32

5.6 Start Settings

5.6.1 Start Zero Speed Time 171 uint8

5.6.2 Start Function 172 enum

5.6.3 Enable Flying Start 173 enum

5.6.4 Start Speed [Hz] 175 uint16

5.6.5 Start Current 176 uint32

5.6.6 Breakaway Current Boost 422 enum

5.6.7 Start Max Speed [Hz] 178 uint16

5.6.8 Start Max Time to Trip 179 uint8

5.6.11 Sync. Motor Start Mode 170 enum

5.6.12 Sync. Motor Detection Current % 146 uint16

5.6.13 Sync. Motor Parking Time 207 uint16

5.6.14 Sync. Motor Parking Current % 206 uint16

5.6.15 Sync. High Starting Torque Time [s] 3020 uint16

5.6.16 Sync. High Starting Torque Current 3021 uint32

[%]

5.7 Stop Settings

5.7.1 Function at Stop 180 enum

5.7.2 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] 182 uint16

5.7.3 DC Brake Time 202 uint16

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 281

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

5.7.4 DC Brake Current % 201 uint16

5.7.5 DC Brake Frequency 204 uint16

5.7.6 DC Hold Current % 200 uint16

5.7.7 Quick Stop Ramp Time 381 uint32

5.8 Speed Control

5.8.1 Rotation Direction 410 enum

5.8.2 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 414 uint16

5.8.3 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 412 uint16

5.8.8 Torque Limit Mode Speed Ctrl 420 enum

5.8.11 Band 1, High Limit 463 uint16

5.8.12 Band 1, Low Limit 461 uint16

5.9 Inching

5.9.1 Jog Ramp Time 380 uint32

5.9.2 Jog Reference 1 311 uint16

5.1 Torque Control

5.10.1 Motor Torque Limit 416 uint16

5.10.2 Regenerative Torque Limit 417 uint16

5.10.3 Speed Limit Mode Torque Ctrl. 421 enum

5.10.4 Torque PID Proportional Gain 712 uint16

5.10.5 Torque PID Integration Time 713 uint16

5.10.6 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 1425 uint8

5.11 Mechanical Brake Control

5.11.1 Brake Closing Speed 222 uint16

5.11.2 Brake Close Time 223 uint8

5.11.3 Release Brake Current 220 uint32

5.11.4 Mech. Brake w/ dir. Change 239 enum

5.12 Process Control

5.12.1 Status

5.12.1.1 Process PID Error 1890 int16

5.12.1.2 Process PID Output 1891 int16

5.12.1.3 Process PID Clamped Output 1892 int16

5.12.1.4 Process PID Gain Scaled Output 1893 int16

5.12.1.5 Feedback Value 1652 int32

282 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

5.12.4 Feedback

5.12.4.1 Feedback 1 Resource 720 enum

5.12.4.2 Feedback 2 Resource 722 enum

5.12.4.3 Feedback 1 Conversion 760 enum

5.12.4.4 Feedback 2 Conversion 762 enum

5.12.5 PID Controller

5.12.5.1 PID Proportional Gain 733 uint16

5.12.5.2 PID Integral Time 734 uint32

5.12.5.4 Antiwindup Enabled 731 enum

5.12.5.5 PID Differentiation Time 735 uint16

5.12.5.6 PID Diff. Gain Limit 736 uint16

5.12.5.7 PID Normal/ Inverse Control 730 enum

5.12.5.8 PID Start Speed 732 uint16

5.12.5.9 On Reference Bandwidth 739 uint8

5.12.6 Feed Forward

5.12.6.1 PID Feed Forward Factor 738 uint16

5.12.7 SleepMode

5.12.7.1 Sleep Mode in Process Closed-loop 2202 enum

Mode

5.12.7.2 Minimum Run Time 2240 uint16

5.12.7.3 Minimum Sleep Time 2241 uint16

5.12.7.4 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] 2243 uint16

5.12.7.5 Wake-Up Reference/Feedback Dif- 2244 uint8

ference

5.12.7.6 Setpoint Boost 2245 int8

5.12.7.7 Maximum Boost Time 2246 uint16

5.12.7.8 Sleep Speed [Hz] 2247 uint16

5.12.7.9 Sleep Delay Time 2248 uint16

5.12.7.10 Wake-Up Delay Time 2249 uint16

5.27 Fieldbus Process Data

5.27.1 PCD Write Selection 842 enum

5.27.2 PCD Read Selection 843 enum

5.27.3 PCD User Define 843 uint16

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 283

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

6 Maintenance & Service

6.1 Status

6.1.1 Latest Fault Number 1530 uint8

6.1.2 Operating Hours 1500 uint32

6.1.3 Running Hours 1501 uint32

6.1.4 kWh Counter 1502 uint32

6.1.5 Power Up's 1503 uint32

6.1.6 Over Temp's 1504 uint16

6.1.7 Overvolt's 1505 uint16

6.1.8 Reset kWh Counter 1506 enum

6.1.9 Reset Running Hours Counter 1507 enum

6.1.10 Internal Fault Reason 1531 int16

6.1.11 Fault Log: Time 1532 uint32

6.2 Software Information

6.2.1 Application Version 1543 Visible

String

6.2.2 SW ID Control Card 1549 Visible

String

6.2.3 SW ID Power Card 1550 Visible

String

6.2.7 ECP SW Version 1548 Visible

String

6.5 Cooling Fan

6.5.1 Fan Control Mode 1452 enum

6.6 Parameter Handling

6.6.1 Active Set-up 10 enum

6.6.2 Programming Set-up 11 enum

6.6.3 Link Setups 12 enum

6.6.4 Set-up Copy 51 enum

6.6.6 Reset Mode 1420 enum

6.6.7 Automatic Restart Time 1421 uint16

6.6.8 Operation Mode 1422 enum

6.6.9 Service Code 1429 uint32

6.6.12 ECP Copy 50 enum

284 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

6.6.20 Password 60 uint16

6.6.21 Production Settings 1428 enum

6.6.22 Defined Parameters 1592 uint16

6.6.23 Drive Identification 1598 Visible

String

6.6.26 Language 1 enum

6.7 Drive Identification

6.7.1 Drive Type 1540 Visible

String

6.7.2 Power Section 1541 Visible

String

6.7.3 Voltage 1542 Visible

String

6.7.4 Ordered Model Code 1544 Visible

String

6.7.6 Drive Ordering No 1546 Visible

String

6.7.7 Drive Serial Number 1551 Visible

String

6.7.9 Power Card Serial Number 1553 Visible

String

8 Customization

8.1 Custom Readout

8.1.1 Custom Readout 1609 int32

8.1.2 Custom Readout Unit 30 enum

8.1.3 Custom Readout Min Value 31 int32

8.1.4 Custom Readout Max Value 32 int32

8.4 Smart Logic Controller

8.4.1 Status

8.4.1.1 Controller State 1638 uint8

8.4.1.2 Counter A 1672 int16

8.4.1.3 Counter B 1673 int16

8.4.2 SLC Settings

8.4.2.1 Enable Controller 1300 enum

8.4.2.2 Start Controller 1301 enum

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 285

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

8.4.2.3 Stop Controller 1302 enum

8.4.2.4 Reset Controller 1303 enum

8.4.3 Comparators

8.4.3.1 Comparator Operand 1310 enum

8.4.3.2 Comparator Operator 1311 enum

8.4.3.3 Comparator Value 1312 int32

8.4.4 Timers

8.4.4.1 Timer 1320 uint32

8.4.5 Logic Rules

8.4.5.1 Logic Rule Boolean 1 1340 enum

8.4.5.2 Logic Rule Operator 1 1341 enum

8.4.5.3 Logic Rule Boolean 2 1342 enum

8.4.5.4 Logic Rule Operator 2 1343 enum

8.4.5.5 Logic Rule Boolean 3 1344 enum

8.4.6 States

8.4.6.1 Event 1351 enum

8.4.6.2 Action 1352 enum

9 I/O

9.3 I/O Status

9.3.1 Digital Input Status 1660 uint16

9.3.2 Digital Output Status 1666 uint16

9.3.3 T31 Analog Output [mA] 1665 uint16

9.3.4 T33 Setting 1661 enum

9.3.5 T33 Analog Input 1662 uint16

9.3.6 T34 Setting 1663 enum

9.3.7 T34 Analog Input 1664 uint16

9.3.8 T18 Pulse Input [Hz] 1668 int32

9.3.9 T15 Pulse Output [Hz] 1669 int32

9.3.10 Relay Output 1671 uint16

9.4 Digital Inputs/Outputs

9.4.1 Digital Input Setting

9.4.1.1 Digital I/O mode 500 enum

9.4.1.2 T13 Digital Input 510 enum

286 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

9.4.1.3 T14 Digital Input 511 enum

9.4.1.4 T15 Digital Input 512 enum

9.4.1.5 T17 Digital Input 513 enum

9.4.1.6 T18 Digital Input 515 enum

9.4.2 T15 as Digital Output

9.4.2.1 T15 Mode 501 enum

9.4.2.2 T15 Digital Output 530 enum

9.4.2.3 T15 DO ON-Delay 534 uint16

9.4.2.4 T15 DO OFF-Delay 535 uint16

9.4.3 Relay

9.4.3.1 Function Relay 540 enum

9.4.3.2 Relay ON-Delay 541 uint16

9.4.3.3 Relay OFF-Delay 542 uint16

9.4.4 T18 as Pulse Input

9.4.4.1 T18 High Frequency 556 uint32

9.4.4.2 T18 Low Frequency 555 uint32

9.4.4.3 T18 High Ref./Feedb. Value 558 int32

9.4.4.4 T18 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 557 int32

9.4.4.5 T18 Pulse Filter Time Constant 559 uint16

9.4.4.6 T18 PWM Polarity 505 enum

9.4.4.7 T18 High Duty 507 uint16

9.4.4.8 T18 Low Duty 506 uint16

9.4.5 T15 as Pulse Output

9.4.5.1 T15 Pulse Output Variable 560 enum

9.4.5.2 T15 Pulse Output Max Freq 562 uint32

9.4.6 Bus Control

9.4.6.1 Digital & Relay Bus Control 590 uint32

9.4.6.2 T15 Pulse Out Bus Control 593 uint16

9.4.6.3 T15 Pulse Out Timeout Preset 594 uint16

9.5 Analog Inputs/Outputs

9.5.1 Output Terminal 31

9.5.1.1 T31 Mode 690 enum

9.5.1.2 T31 Analog Output 691 enum

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 287

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

9.5.1.3 T31 Output Max Scale 694 uint16

9.5.1.4 T31 Output Min Scale 693 uint16

9.5.1.5 T31 Output Bus Control 696 uint16

9.5.2 Input Terminal 33

9.5.2.1 T33 Mode 619 enum

9.5.2.2 T33 High Voltage 611 uint16

9.5.2.3 T33 Low Voltage 610 uint16

9.5.2.4 T33 High Current 613 uint16

9.5.2.5 T33 Low Current 612 uint16

9.5.2.6 T33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 615 int32

9.5.2.7 T33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 614 int32

9.5.2.8 T33 Filter Time Constant 616 uint16

9.5.2.9 T33 Voltage Dead Zone Scale 617 uint16

9.5.2.10 T33 Current Dead Zone Scale 618 uint16

9.5.3 Input Terminal 34

9.5.3.1 T34 Mode 629 enum

9.5.3.2 T34 High Voltage 621 uint16

9.5.3.3 T34 Low Voltage 620 uint16

9.5.3.4 T34 High Current 623 uint16

9.5.3.5 T34 Low Current 622 uint16

9.5.3.6 T34 High Ref./Feedb. Value 625 int32

9.5.3.7 T34 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 624 int32

9.5.3.8 T34 Filter Time Constant 626 uint16

9.5.3.9 T34 Voltage Dead Zone Scale 627 uint16

9.5.3.10 T34 Current Dead Zone Scale 628 uint16

9.5.4 Potentiometer Reference

9.5.4.1 Potentiometer High Ref. 682 int32

9.5.4.2 Potentiometer Low Ref. 681 int32

9.5.6 Live Zero

9.5.6.1 Live Zero Response 600 uint8

9.5.6.2 Live Zero Timeout Function 601 enum

10 Connectivity

10.1 FC Port Settings

288 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

Group index Group name Parameter Parameter name Parameter Type

index number

10.1.1 Protocol 830 enum

10.1.2 Address 831 uint8

10.1.3 Baud Rate 832 enum

10.1.4 Parity / Stop Bits 833 enum

10.1.5 Maximum Response Delay 836 uint16

10.1.6 Minimum Response Delay 835 uint16

10.2 FC Port Diagnostics

10.2.1 Bus Message Count 880 uint32

10.2.2 Bus Error Count 881 uint32

10.2.3 Slave Messages Rcvd 882 uint32

10.2.4 Slave Error Count 883 uint32

10.2.5 Slave Messages Sent 884 uint32

10.2.6 Slave Timeout Errors 885 uint32

10.2.7 Reset FC port Diagnostics 888 enum

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254 | 289

Application Guide | iC2-Micro Frequency Converters

290 | Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
drives.danfoss.com

Any information, including, but not limited to information on selection of product, its application or use, product design, weight, dimensions, capacity or any other technical
data in product manuals, catalog descriptions, advertisements, etc. and whether made available in writing, orally, electronically, online or via download, shall be considered
informative, and is only binding if and to the extent, explicit reference is made in a quotation or order confirmation. Danfoss cannot accept any responsibility for possible
errors in catalogs, brochures, videos and other material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to products ordered but not delivered
provided that such alterations can be made without changes to form, fit or function of the product. All trademarks in this material are property of Danfoss A/S or Danfoss
group companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logo are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

M0036401

Danfoss A/S © 2024.03 AB413939445838en-000301 / 130R1254

*130R1254*